warehouse management system - sage partner portal · pdf filepicking orders by wave (regular...

HHeld TTL.doc, printed on 9/28/2005, at 3:16:40 PM.SAGE ACCPAC SAGE PRO

Warehouse Management System

Using Sage Accpac WMS Handheld Functions

ACCPAC International, Inc. Confidential

HHeld TTL.doc, printed on 9/28/2005, at 3:16:40 PM. Last saved on 9/28/2005 3:15:00 PM.
©2005 Sage Accpac International, Inc. All rights reserved. Sage Software, Sage Software logos, and all Sage Accpac product and service names are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sage Accpac International, Inc., or its affiliated entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Sage Accpac International, Inc. Publisher No part of this documentation may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, microfilmed, or otherwise duplicated on any medium without written consent of Sage Accpac International, Inc.
ACCPAC International, Inc. Confidential

Use of the software programs described herein and this documentation is subject to the Sage Software License Agreement enclosed in the software package.

U S I N G S A G E A C C P A C W M S H A N D H E L D F U N C T I O N S

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENTAudience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiAbout Optional Software Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiPurpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xivGetting Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvDocument Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

CHAPTER 1USING THE HANDHELD INTERFACEStarting Sage Accpac WMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Navigating Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Scanning Barcodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Selecting Options from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Using Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Using Function Keys on the Web Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Accepting Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Identifying Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Handling Products with Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Canceling Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Exiting Sage Accpac WMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

CHAPTER 2RECEIVING INVENTORYUnderstanding Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Receiving Products with Purchase Orders/Manifests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Receiving Products without Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Receiving By Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Starting a Wave of Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Stopping and Restarting a PO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Stopping and Restarting a Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Selecting Products in the Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Random Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

I I I


Checking-in Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Receiving without a Purchase Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Putting Away Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Bin Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Closing a Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Quick Container Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Completing the Quick Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Handing Incomplete Quick Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Receiving By ASN Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Completing the ASN Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Creating Transfer Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

CHAPTER 3MOVING/PUTTING AWAY INVENTORYUnderstanding Moving and Putaway Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Looking Up Bin Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Moving Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Moving Products Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Moving Products In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Moving Products in One Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Reserving and Unreserving Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Reserving Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Unreserving Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Restocking Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Finding Homes for Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Selecting a Current Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Finding an Empty Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Moving Serialized Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

CHAPTER 4REPLENISHING PICK BINSUnderstanding Replenishment Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Creating Replenishment Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Letting Down Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Letting Down Stock by Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Letting Down Stock by Quantity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Letting Down Stock by Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

I V


Letting Down Stock by Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Letting Down Stock by Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Filling Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Selecting the Product to Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Selecting the Bins to Fill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

CHAPTER 5KITTING AND PACKAGINGAbout the Kitting and Packaging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Understanding the Kitting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Accessing the Kitting/Packaging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Pulling Kits/Packaging Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Finishing Kits/Packaging Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Picking Build-to-Order Kits into Shipping Cartons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Entering Work Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Disassembling Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

CHAPTER 6PICKING AND PACKING ORDERSAbout Picking and Packing Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Understanding Picking and Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Understanding Picking Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Starting a Wave of Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Selecting a Picking Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Starting a Dispatcher- or System-Waved Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Creating a Wave from the Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Picking Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Understanding and Selecting Picking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Picking Orders by Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Picking Orders by Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Picking Orders in One Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Handling Picks You Cannot Fulfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Skipping a Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Shorting a Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Unpicking an Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

V


Entering Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Creating a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Adding Lines to a Sales Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Completing a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

CHAPTER 7REPACKING ORDERSUnderstanding Repacking Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Repacking Entire Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Repacking Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Stopping and Restarting Repacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Repacking Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Combining Cartons in an Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Relabeling Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Changing a Carton Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Marking a Carton As Repacked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

CHAPTER 8SHIPPING ORDERSUnderstanding Shipping Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Processing Shipping Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Handling Shipping Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Re-rating Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Recording Shipment Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Capturing Additional Barcodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Adding Cartons to Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Marking External Processes Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

CHAPTER 9PRINTING LABELSUnderstanding Label Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Understanding Printer Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268About the Print Labels Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Redirecting Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Printing Bin Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

V I


Printing Product Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Printing Product (Unit) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Printing Overstock (Case) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Printing SCC-14 Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Printing License Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Reprinting ASN SSCC-18 Format Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Reprinting Picking/Shipping Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Reprinting Paper Packslips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Printing Shipping Carton Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Printing Single Carton Contents Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Printing Numbered Carton Contents Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Printing Summary Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Printing Placard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

CHAPTER 10COUNTING INVENTORYUnderstanding Inventory Counting Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Performing a Cycle Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Cycle Counting by Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Cycle Counting by Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Cycle Counting by Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Performing a Full Stock Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Performing the First Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Performing a Recount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Counting Products in a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Counting by Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Counting by Each . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Completing a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Stopping and Restarting a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Stopping a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Restarting a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

CHAPTER 11ADJUSTING INVENTORYUnderstanding Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Adjustments to License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Using Miscellaneous Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Creating an Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

V I I


Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Adjusting License Plates Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

CHAPTER 12WAREHOUSE AND PRODUCT MAINTENANCEAdding New Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Displaying Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Setting or Modifying Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Setting or Modifying a Product’s UPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Enabling or Disabling Attribute Tracking for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Setting or Modifying a Product’s Product Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Enabling or Disabling Expiry-Date Tracking for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Setting or Modifying a Product’s Packsizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Setting or Modifying a Product’s Bin Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Deleting Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Setting, Modifying, or Deleting Product Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Deleting a Product Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Setting Minimum Replenishment Levels for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Setting Maximum Replenishment Levels for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Setting or Modifying Sticky Homes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Assigning a Product to a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Unassigning a Product from a Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels for a Specific Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

CHAPTER 13USING LICENSE PLATESUnderstanding License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

License Plate Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382License Plate Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Creating License Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Adding Products to License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Removing Products From License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Deleting License Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Moving License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Picking an Order Using License Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

V I I I


INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

I X


ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

This manual provides conceptual information and step-by-step operational procedures for the Sage Accpac WMS handheld or PC Telnet application. It is highly recommended that you read the introductory companion manual, Overview of Sage Accpac WMS before working with the procedures contained in this manual.

AUDIENCE

This document is intended for the following readers:

• Warehouse staff who use the Sage Accpac WMS handheld application for daily warehouse operations.

• Warehouse supervisors or managers who need to understand handheld functions for the purposes of administering the warehouse and processing orders through Sage Accpac WMS Web Dispatch, or for training handheld users on warehouse-specific procedures.

• Sage Accpac partners and resellers, and warehouse system administrators or IT managers, who need to understand Sage Accpac WMS functions for the purposes of system installation, setup, and ongoing configuration.

This manual assumes some familiarity with basic warehousing concepts, but not necessarily with concepts or terminology that are specific to warehouse management systems (WMS) or to Sage Accpac WMS.

X I


ABOUT OPTIONAL SOFTWARE MODULES

Sage Accpac WMS is shipped and licensed as a modular product. This means that the version of Sage Accpac WMS that you are using may not include all of the features described in this document. The Sage Accpac WMS documentation set is based on the core modules, plus the Order Management and Web Dispatch modules. Wherever optional features are discussed that are not included in the core, Order Management, or Web Dispatch modules of Sage Accpac WMS, an icon indicates the relevant module which you must purchase to be able to use this feature. If your system does not include that module, you can easily skip over the material that does not apply to your implementation. The following table lists the optional modules that are documented, and the icons that represent each module.

Icon Module

Multi-Location/Site Transfer

Multi-Zone

Multi-Company/Third-Party Logistics

Lots/Serials/Expiry

Kitting

Packaging

Container Receiving

LOC

ZONE

3PL

ATT

KIT

PACK

RECV

X I I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T


Note: Operations pertaining to the Carousels/Conveyors, and the RFID module are not documented in this manual, as they involve special hardware consideration. The cross-docking handheld functions are also not described in this manual, as they are documented as part of the complete cross-docking procedure and involve an understanding of the complete process.

Putaway/Slotting/Cube/Weight

Advance/Min-Max Replenishment

Web Order Entry

Integrated Shipping/End-of-Line Settings

Returned Materials Authorizations

Demand Forecasting

Vendor Portal and Cross Docking

RFID

Carousel/Conveyor

Icon Module

PUT

REPLEN

O/E

SHIP

RMA

FCAST

VPCD

RFID

CA/CO

X I I I


PURPOSE

Since it is assumed that readers will have undergone a minimum of on-site training with Sage Accpac WMS, the material in this manual should serve to reinforce and refresh the knowledge gained from the training courses. Wherever relevant, the manual describes and compares several ways of accomplishing similar or related tasks, and explains the reasons or contexts for which you might use one function rather than another.

Because every warehouse implementation is different, it is impossible to document all possible functions and configurations of Sage Accpac WMS. Therefore, this document covers the basic, core features which are used by the majority of warehouses and are considered ‘generic’.

Furthermore, to illustrate handheld functions, the document uses a basic data set and the configuration similar to that which ships with the product by default. In a real-life implementation, however, it is likely that you will not be using some features that are described in the manual, and that you may even be using additional, customized features that are not described in the manual.

Wherever possible, the text indicates where an alternate configuration may result in different prompts or steps; however, to avoid overly interrupting the flow of procedures, we have not documented every possible path or outcome for a given function. The exact steps, screens, and prompts that will appear in your implementation are likely to differ from those depicted in this manual. It is hoped that you will be able to adapt the procedures to your particular context, and to develop quick reference cards that provide step-by-step instructions for your exact configuration and data set.

X I V A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T


GETTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

The following manuals contain additional information about Sage Accpac WMS components:

Overview of Sage Accpac WMS

Using Web Dispatch

X V


DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS

The following formatting conventions are used throughout this document:

Convention Explanation

Initial Caps Indicates the name of a Sage Accpac WMS function.

Example:

The cartons are sent to the shipping area and, optionally, weighed and scanned with the Carton Shipping function.

ALL CAPS Indicates a Sage Accpac WMS system name, such as a bin location or an order or carton status.

Example:

The order is in the status of SUSPENDED and cannot be processed further until it is released.

SMALL CAPS Indicates the name of a key you must press.

Example:

To go up a level or exit a function, press ENTER, or [F1], if available.square brackets ([ ])

Indicates that you must press a key or combination of keys on the handheld. Because different handheld devices have different keypads, the brackets indicate that you may need to use a different equivalent key or set of keys on your handheld.

Example:

To go up a level or exit a function, press ENTER, or [F1], if available.monospace text

Indicates text that you must enter exactly as shown.

Example:

Enter localhost if you are running Telnet on the server machine.

X V I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T


bold monospace text

Indicates text that appears on the screen.

Example:

From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Fill Bins.

italics Indicates a newly introduced term, emphasis, or a manual title.

Example:

It cannot be further processed until the dispatcher unsuspends it.

> Indicates the start of a procedure.

Example:

> To start picking an order:

Convention Explanation

X V I I


1 USING THE HANDHELD INTERFACE

This chapter discusses the following topics that familiarize you with basic handheld operations:

• “Starting Sage Accpac WMS” on page 1.

• “Navigating Menus” on page 5.

• “Scanning Barcodes” on page 6.

• “Selecting Options from Lists” on page 7.

• “Using Function Keys” on page 8.

• “Accepting Default Values” on page 9.

• “Identifying Products” on page 10.

• “Handling Products with Attributes” on page 12.

• “Canceling Actions” on page 14.

• “Exiting Sage Accpac WMS” on page 14.

STARTING SAGE ACCPAC WMS

You can access Sage Accpac WMS handheld functions from a handheld device, from a web browser using the Web Workstation, or from a PC running a Telnet client application.

1


To log on to Sage Accpac WMS:

1. Do one of the following:

If you are using an RF handheld terminal, start your handheld.

If you are using the Web Workstation, first ensure that the Sage Accpac (RFBase) Console is running. If not, click the AWMS Handheld icon on the desktop or select AWMS Handheld from the Sage Accpac WMS program group on the Windows Start menu.

In the address bar of Internet Explorer, enter.

http://<computer>:81

Where <computer> is the IP address or machine name of the server on which the handheld thread is running, or localhost if you are running the Web Workstation on the Sage Accpac WMS server machine.

If you are using a Telnet client program on a PC, enter the IP address or machine name of the server on which the handheld thread is running, or enter localhost if you are running Telnet on the server machine.

2 C H A P T E R 1 U S I N G T H E H A N D H E L D I N T E R F A C E


The WMS logon screen is displayed.

2. To log on, at the User ID prompt, enter your ID and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter your password.

User ID: TOMPassword:

The logon screen for the RF handheld appears as follows:

The logon screen for the Web Workstation appears as follows:

You may select one of the alternate Web Workstation displays such as 8-carton Repack Station or Symbol M90.

Sage Accpac WMSConsole TerminalUser ID:

3


3. At the Password prompt, enter your password and press ENTER. The main menu appears, displaying the functions which you have permission to access.

Logging onto the Web Workstation (or the Sage Accpac Console) also provides the current status of orders in WMS.

ZZ Limited 1/21-Logoff2-Receiving3-Overstock4-Pick + Pack5-Shipping6-Cycle Count7-Label Printing



NAVIGATING MENUS

Note: The display of menus on the handheld will not necessarily be the same as those depicted in this manual; the actual menu items you will see are determined by your configuration, and by your user permissions.

Depending on your user permissions, you may have two main menu screens. If so, you will see 1/2 in the top right corner of the initial menu screen, which means that it is one of two screens. To alternate between these two screens, press ENTER or [F3] for Next Page.

To access any of the sub-menus in a menu, press the number that corresponds to the menu that you want to open. When you do so, you are presented with a list of functions that make up the sub-menu. For example, pressing 2 opens the Receiving menu, which displays a list of new sub-menus, or functions.

RECIVING 1/2

1-Regular Receiving2-Random Receiving3-Non-PO Receiving4-ASN Receiving5-RMA Receiving6-Create Transfer PO7-Container Receiving

The Candy Wareho 1/21-Logoff2-Receiving3-Overstock4-Pick + Pack5-Shipping6-Cycle Count7-Label Printing

The Candy Wareho 2/21-Misc Adjusts2-Warehouse Maint3-Work Orders4-RFID Portal5-Add Memo6-Cross Dock

The number of this screen.

The total number of screens available for this menu.

5


To go up a level, press [F2] for Up Menu. You can press ENTER to go up a level, if the sub-menu has only one page, or if you are on the last page of a sub-menu.

From a sub-menu, the navigation function keys are as follows:

After selecting a function from a menu or sub-menu, to exit the function, press ENTER, or [F1], if available.

To understand the function keys on the different interfaces, refer to “Using Function Keys” on page 8.

SCANNING BARCODES

Many functions require that you enter identification codes for products, bins, shipping cartons, orders and so on. The easiest way to enter these codes is usually to use the handheld to scan the barcodes printed in product labels, bin labels, picking/shipping labels, or other documents.

However, in cases where it may be awkward or inconvenient to scan barcodes, you can also key in equivalent numerical codes, such as product numbers, shipping container numbers, order numbers, etc. Usually you need to press ENTER after keying in a number in order for WMS to recognize it.

F1 Main MenuF2 Go up one menu levelF3 Go to the next page of items for the current menu

CONTENT LABEL

Carton: 100000008

Entering a number on the keypad is equivalent to scanning a barcode.



SELECTING OPTIONS FROM LISTS

In many functions, you are presented with a list of items, such as product numbers, bin numbers, and so on.

To select these items, you can do any of the following:

• Press the number to the left of the item.

• Scan the barcode on the label of the relevant bin, product, or carton.

• Key in the (alpha-)numeric identifier of the bin, product or carton, and press ENTER.

• If you’re using the Web Workstation, you click an item in the list

Again, the presence of the numbers in the top of the screen indicates the total number of screens that apply to this list of options. Be sure to press ENTER to view other screens before making a selection. You can usually press [F9] to return to a previous screen.

LF408 1/1Select: 1:A3 6*252:C2 8*253:B3 5*1004:C1 2*1005:REPLENIS 23*1006:BULK3 2*2500

7


USING FUNCTION KEYS

When asked to use a function key or combination of function keys, you must press the corresponding function key button(s) on your RF handheld.

Some handhelds have function keys labelled F1 through F10, while others use a combination of keys to enter in the appropriate function. In this manual, brackets ([]) are used to indicate that you may need to enter a combination of keys to select the equivalent function key.

USING FUNCTION KEYS ON THE WEB WORKSTATION

On the Web Workstation, function keys are displayed as buttons or hyperlinks on the screen. You can use your mouse to click the function keys to select them.

Example 1: Normal display on the Web Workstation:

DIRECT MOVEPRODUCT

F3/F4:Pallet In/Out

Click



Example 2: Symbol M90 display on the Web Workstation

Pressing the function keys on the keyboard will not perform the corresponding handheld function. To enter the function from the keyboard, type: ‘~’ (i.e., tilde), then ‘f’, then <number>. For example, [F9] is typed ~f9.

ACCEPTING DEFAULT VALUES

In many functions, a default (expected) value is presented in parentheses. When you see this default, if the value is correct, you can simply press ENTER to accept it, rather than having to enter the value itself.

Click

BIN: BULK1Expected: 12

LF409Q per P: (Default: 2500)Life Savers PepOMint

If this value is correct, simply press ENTER to accept it.

9


IDENTIFYING PRODUCTS

When you scan a product barcode, the barcode may contain any of the following information:

• the warehouse product number

• the vendor part number

• the UPC number

• the SSCC-14 number

• the client number/name

• the lot number

• the serial number

• other product attributes, such as the size, colour, weight of the product

(For more information on product numbers, please see “Product Numbers” in the manual Using Web Dispatch.)

In all handheld functions, when you scan a barcode to identify a product, Sage Accpac WMS tries to identify the exact product based on the information provided in the barcode. However, if the barcode does not contain all the information required to precisely identify the product, there could be an ambiguity; that is, the same barcode number may apply to multiple products. This could be the case if:

• Your products use attributes, such as lot numbers.

• Your products have other IDs, such as UPC numbers, supplier codes, or barcode cross-references, and more than one product number is associated with the same barcode.

• Your products are associated with multiple clients.

ATT

ATT

3PL

1 0 C H A P T E R 1 U S I N G T H E H A N D H E L D I N T E R F A C E


In these cases, the system will search for all products that match the barcode you scanned, and if it finds more than one, a screen will appear, prompting you to identify the exact product you want. Depending on the barcode you have scanned (e.g. a product number, a serial number, a UPC number, and so on), this screen could show product numbers, product descriptions, client names, or attribute numbers. For example, if you scan the product number of a product that belongs to multiple lots, a screen such as the one below will appear, displaying all the lot numbers found for that product. You would need to select the lot number of the item you are currently handling.

When you are prompted with such a screen, press the number corresponding to the correct product and press ENTER, or scan the barcode containing the lot number you are handling.

Note: If you begin to enter the first few digits of the barcode, the system will automatically fill in the rest.

Or, if you want to get more information, you can toggle between the following screens:

• To show a list of product numbers associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F5].

• To show a list of product descriptions associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F6].

• If your warehouse is a 3PL/multi-company operation, to show a list of client names/numbers associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F7].

• To show a list of attributes associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F8]. Note that the availability of this option will depend on how your system is configured to track attributes; for more information, see “Handling Products with Attributes” on page 12.

LF311 1/2SERIAL #\LOT #1:\2:\LOT34953:\LOT38574:\LOT69385:\LOT48476:\LOT2736

3PL

ATT

1 1


• To show a list of the types of identifiers that matched the barcode you scanned (such as UPC number, vendor part number, barcode cross-reference, or attribute number), press [F9].

• To page up, press [F2].

• To shift to the right, press [F9].

HANDLING PRODUCTS WITH ATTRIBUTES

If your warehouse handles products with attributes, such as lot or serial numbers, you will be prompted to identify the attribute number of the product during various handheld functions. The functions in which you will be prompted for attribute numbers depend on how your system is configured to track attributes. For information on the different configurations possible, see “Attribute” in the manual Overview of Sage Accpac WMS .

Note: If your products use more than one attribute, each attribute type may be configured with a different scenario.

When handling products with non-unique attributes, such as lot numbers, depending on the functions configured to track attributes in your system, you may be prompted to select from a list of existing lots, if they have already been recorded in a previous function.

ATT

LF311 1/1SERIAL #\LOT #1:\2:\LOT34953:\LOT38574:\LOT69385:\LOT48476:\LOT2736

The first item in this list represents the “master” product, with no specific lot number.



In all functions except receiving and adjusting product in, you must identify a valid, existing lot number. When receiving and adjusting product in, you also have the option of adding new numbers.

In many functions, after selecting the attribute number from a list, you may be required to scan the barcode containing the attribute again, to confirm the number of the item(s) you are actually handling. The last lot number that you scanned will usually be displayed. To accept the displayed attribute number, you can simply press ENTER; otherwise, scan the barcode number containing the attribute number, or enter the attribute number, and press ENTER.

By contrast, when handling products with unique attributes, such as serial numbers, you will usually be required to scan the barcode of each item you are handling. The screen indicates how many items remain to be scanned.

With the exception receiving, cycle counting, and adjusting product in, the serial numbers you scan must match existing numbers already recognized by the system.

LF408

LOT #3782

LOT #

If this value is correct, simply press ENTER to accept it.

LF211 2 of 2SERIAL #

SERIAL #

Item to be scanned.

Total number of items to be scanned.

1 3


CANCELING ACTIONS

In most functions, if you change your mind and want to cancel your previous actions before you have completed the function, you can press [F1] to exit. (In some cases, you can also use ENTER to accomplish the same thing.) Any changes you have made will be discarded.

EXITING SAGE ACCPAC WMS

When you are finished an Sage Accpac WMS session, you should log off.

> To exit Sage Accpac WMS:

1. Go to the first screen of the main menu.

2. Press 1 to select Logoff. The logon screen is displayed.

3. To shut down Sage Accpac WMS from a handheld, turn off your handheld. To shut down Sage Accpac WMS on a PC, close your web browser or your Telnet connection.



2 RECEIVING INVENTORY

UNDERSTANDING RECEIVING

Sage Accpac WMS supports various methods of receiving stock into the warehouse, based on the way in which the products arrive in the warehouse, such as:

• Stock that was ordered on a purchase order, or appears on an incoming manifest or other documentation. See “Receiving Products with Purchase Orders/Manifests” on page 15.

• Stock that arrives at the warehouse without a purchase order. See “Receiving Products without Purchase Orders” on page 17.

• Products that are currently in inventory, but arrive at the warehouse from another warehouse location. For example, transfers from other warehouse sites, or containers that were ‘checked-in’ electronically, but not yet physically unloaded. See “Creating Transfer Purchase Orders” on page 62.

RECEIVING PRODUCTS WITH PURCHASE ORDERS/MANIFESTS

Purchase orders or manifests may be provided to you in printed form, or may simply exist electronically in the system. Your warehouse will probably have a procedure for providing you with the appropriate documentation if required.

1 5


Sage Accpac WMS supports the following methods of receiving products that are accompanied by purchase orders or other incoming documents.

• By purchase order

This is the regular, or most common way, of receiving. If a shipment arrives with products sorted by purchase order, you receive the stock according to a PO. Described in “Receiving By Wave” on page 18.

• By product

This is referred to as random receiving. When products, or groups of products, arrive at the warehouse, you can receive the products against any open purchase order. This is called random receiving because the products arrive ‘randomly’, rather than being sorted by purchase order. Described in “Random Receiving” on page 36.

• By container

For warehouses that normally receive large shipments by container, in which products on many POs may be mixed, you receive the stock against a container reference number or manifest. Two container receiving methods are available:

• Regular container receiving—each line on the container manifest is checked-in individually. This method allows the user to verify that the manifest matches the actual contents of the container. Described in “Receiving By Wave” on page 18.

• Quick container receiving—the entire contents of the container is checked-in at once. This method an efficient way of receiving stock into the warehouse, based on purchase orders in a shipment from a trusted source. Described in “Quick Container Receiving” on page 55.

• By RMA (return materials authorization)

For warehouses and customers that use RMAs for large volumes of returns, you use the RMA function to receive this stock. Described in “Receiving By Wave” on page 18.

RECV

RMA

1 6 C H A P T E R 2 R E C E I V I N G I N V E N T O R Y


• By ASN

Using Sage Accpac WMS’s Vendor Portal, suppliers/vendors create compliant ASN shipping labels for the cartons they send to your warehouse. You can check-in the entire carton simply by scanning the track-trace number on the cartons label. Described in “Receiving By ASN Label” on page 60.

RECEIVING PRODUCTS WITHOUT PURCHASE ORDERS

For stock that arrives at the warehouse without a purchase order, there are several ways of handling these:

• As unordered items in PO receiving

You may receive unordered items while receiving purchase orders in the normal receiving process. This option creates and uploads an adjustment for all products that are not on any PO, and is described in “Receiving Unordered Products” on page 42.

• By non-PO receiving

If your system is configured to allow it, this is a separate receiving function that creates adjustments which are uploaded to the accounting system. Non-PO receiving can also be used to assign products to bins during the initial warehouse setup phase. Non-PO receiving is described in “Receiving without a Purchase Order” on page 45.

• As a miscellaneous adjustment

If your system is configured for non-PO receipts as miscellaneous adjustments, you can use the Miscellaneous Adjustments function to receive the stock. For procedures, see “Adjusting Inventory” on page 325.

Depending on your configuration, during the receiving process, you may also be prompted to enter or verify information pertaining to the items or orders being received. For PO receipts, these may include the freight status and cost of the shipment. For all receipts, you may be prompted to weigh, cube, or enter other information for items received. Note that the procedures in this chapter do not include these steps.

VPCD

1 7


RECEIVING BY WAVE

If you receive by purchase order, regular container, or RMA, you receive by wave of purchase orders. Regardless of whether you are receiving a single purchase order, multiple orders in a container, or a single RMA receipt, you must start a wave of purchase orders before you start checking in products. The normal process, then, consists of the following steps:

1. Initiate the receipt, by purchase order, container, or RMA. Procedures for starting a receiving wave are provided in “Starting a Wave of Purchase Orders” on page 19.

2. Receive the products, regardless of the method of receiving selected. There are several ways to identify the products you are receiving. All are described in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33.

3. Receive quantities. Products can be received either by units or by case, depending on your configuration. Receiving quantities is described in “Checking-in Products” on page 39.

4. Put away products to a temporary or permanent location. Again, there are various methods from which you can choose to help you determine where to put your received products. All are described in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

5. Repeat the process for all products and orders in the wave.

6. If your warehouse policy requires you to close purchase orders when you are finished receiving them (rather than having the dispatcher close them), close each purchase order for which you have received products. Procedures for closing POs are provided in “Closing a Purchase Order” on page 54.

If you need to stop or restart a wave, you can do so at any time; follow the procedure in “Stopping and Restarting a PO” on page 29 or, for container receiving, “Stopping and Restarting a Container” on page 31.



STARTING A WAVE OF PURCHASE ORDERS

To create a wave by purchase order, see “Creating a Wave by Purchase Order” on page 19.

To start a wave by container, see “Starting a Wave by Container” on page 23.

To receive by RMA, see “Receiving by RMA” on page 26.

CREATING A WAVE BY PURCHASE ORDER

In most implementations, PO receiving is the default regular method of receiving. Even if you are only receiving a single order, you must still create a wave before you can begin receiving the products on it.

If you are a 3PL or multi-company system, note that you can only receive POs for a single client at a time.

You can build a wave of purchase orders in two ways:

• By scanning each PO.

• By selecting from a list of available POs. (Note, however, that if there are many POs in your database, this method is not recommended, as generating the list of POs may considerably slow down your system.)

3PL

1 9


All methods are included in the following procedure.

> To build a wave of purchase orders:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER.

2. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Regular Receiving, and press ENTER.

3. If your warehouse supports multiple clients/companies, you are prompted to enter the client name. Enter the client name/number and press ENTER.

The Wave Information screen is displayed. If container receiving is the default receiving method, the Container prompt is displayed.

If necessary, press [F7] to toggle to regular wave receiving.

F2-START

Wave InformationOrders: 0Lines: 0Units: 0

3PL

RECV



4. To select a purchase order to add to the wave, do any of the following:

The purchase order number, vendor number and name, lines and units for the order are displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add this purchase order to your wave.

CONFIRM (Yes/No)1193 HER423HER CANDY MFGLines: 1Units: 10

At the F2-Start prompt, scan or enter the purchase order number that you want to begin receiving, and press ENTER.

To select from a list of open purchase orders, press [F5]. A list of all open POs is displayed.

An asterisk (*) next to a PO number indicates that this PO has already been added to a wave, and is in the process of being received, so you cannot add this PO to a new wave. (Doing so will result in an error message.)

Optionally, press ENTER to view additional screens of purchase orders, and press the number corresponding to the PO number you want to select.

Purchase Order 1/11: 1193 *2: 1194 *3: 1195 4: 1196

2 1


5. At the Confirm prompt, enter Y to add this purchase order to the wave, or press N to reject this order and begin again. If you pressed Y, the Wave Information screen is re-displayed, now showing the number of purchase orders in the wave (1), and the total numbers of lines and units in the wave.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each purchase order you want to add to your wave. The orders, lines, and units in the Wave Information are increased for each PO you add to the wave.

7. When you are ready to begin receiving the products in the wave, press [F2].

8. If you are prompted to enter the carrier for the orders, enter the carrier name/number, and press ENTER.

9. If you are prompted to enter a packslip number for the orders, enter the packslip number and press ENTER.

A new wave number is created and displayed at the top of the screen. (You can use this number if you need to stop and restart the wave later; see “Stopping and Restarting a PO” on page 29 for more information.)

F2-START


RECEIVE W: 1002Enter Product #

F2 - Keyword SearchF3 - Recv LabelsF9 - Complete

Wave number



10. Optionally, do any of the following:

11. To begin receiving products in the wave, follow the procedures in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33.

STARTING A WAVE BY CONTAINER

If you are using quick container receiving and you choose not to create a wave, you can follow the procedure in “Quick Container Receiving” on page 55.

When you receive by container, your wave has essentially been created for you: the orders are already grouped into a wave, according to the container reference number. You merely need to identify this reference number, and the wave is automatically started.

Your warehouse may or may not use container receiving as the default method for wave receiving.

To print product unit or overstock labels for all the products in the wave, press [F3]. The type of labels printed is automatically determined by your configuration. You can affix the labels before or during the product receiving process.

To view information for the purchase orders in the wave, press [F5]. Vendor and buyer information for the first purchase order is displayed.

Press ENTER to view information for the next purchase order in the wave. When done, press [F2] to return to the Enter Product # prompt.

Purchase Order 1194Vendor#:C123CANDY MANUFACTURERBuyer:Dale

Enter - NextF2 - Resume

RECV

2 3


> To create a wave by container:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Regular Receiving, and press ENTER

2. The Wave Information screen is displayed. If container receiving is the default receiving method in your warehouse, the Container prompt is displayed.

3. If the Container prompt is not displayed, press [F7] to start container receiving. You are prompted to enter the container reference number.

4. Scan or enter the container number and press ENTER. The total number of orders, lines, and units in the POs on this container are displayed.

5. Press [F2] to start receiving.


F2-START


F2-START

Wave InformationOrders: 0Lines: 0Units: 0Container:

F2-START

Wave InformationOrders: 2Lines: 3Units: 38Container:1000




A new wave number is created and displayed at the top of the screen. (You can use this number if you need to stop and restart the wave later; see “Stopping and Restarting a PO” on page 29 for more information.)


9. To begin receiving products, follow the procedures in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33, or if you wish to receive the products using quick container receiving, press [F6] and follow the procedures in “Quick Container Receiving” on page 55.



Wave number






2 5


RECEIVING BY RMA

When you receive returned goods via a returned materials authorization (RMA), you also use regular wave receiving by PO, but you must use the RMA function from the main menu, rather than the Receiving function. The only difference between regular receiving and RMA receiving is that during the receipt of products, you are prompted to enter an RMA code after you have entered the quantity received.

> To receive by RMA:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to RMA Receiving, and press ENTER.


The Wave Information screen is displayed. If container receiving is the default receiving method, the Container prompt is displayed.

3. If necessary, press [F7] to toggle to regular wave receiving.

RMA

F2-STARTWave InformationOrders: 0Lines: 0Units: 0

3PL

RECV



4. Enter or scan the number of the purchase order containing the items being returned. You are prompted to confirm the addition of this PO to your wave.

5. At the Confirm prompt, enter Y to add this purchase order to the wave, or press N to reject this order and begin again. If you pressed Y, the Wave Information screen is re-displayed, now showing the number of purchase orders in the wave (1), and the total numbers of lines and units in the wave.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each RMA purchase order you want to add to your wave. The orders, lines, and units in the Wave Information are increased for each PO you add to the wave.

7. When you are ready to begin receiving the products in the wave, press [F2].



CONFIRM (Yes/No)R000001 RMA RETURNS

Lines: 1Units: 200

F2-START


2 7


10. A new wave number is created and displayed at the top of the screen. (You can use this number if you need to stop and restart the wave later; see “Stopping and Restarting a PO” on page 29 for more information.)


12. To begin receiving products in the wave, follow the procedures in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33.



Wave number








STOPPING AND RESTARTING A PO

You can stop and restart a PO or a wave of POs, so that more than one receiver can receive goods on a single purchase order or wave at any time. To stop a PO, see the procedure in “Stopping a PO” below. To restart a PO, see the procedure in “Restarting a PO” on page 29.

STOPPING A PO

> To stop a PO or wave of POs:

1. At any point during the receiving process, press [F1].

2. From the Enter Product # prompt, press [F1]. You are returned to the main receiving screen.

RESTARTING A PO

You can restart a wave at any point during the receiving process. However, once a purchase order is closed and uploaded, it is no longer available in the warehouse, and cannot be restarted.

There are two ways to restart a receiving wave:

• From a list of POs.

• By using the Restart function.

Both are described in the following procedure.

2 9


> To restart a PO or wave of POs:

1. From the main receiving screen, do one of the following:

If you have the wave number, or the PO number of one of the orders in the wave, from the main receiving screen, press [F3]. You are prompted to enter the wave number or a purchase order number belonging to the wave that you want to restart.

Enter the wave number, or scan or enter the purchase number, and press ENTER.

To view a list of open POs, press [F5]. POs that are currently part of a wave (or open) have an asterisk (*) next to them:

Optionally, press ENTER to view additional screens of purchase orders, and press the asterisked number corresponding to the PO number you want to select. You are warned that the PO is already being received.

Press [F3] to restart that wave.

RESTART

Key (or scan)

PO of the wave or wave number

Purchase Order 1/11: 1193 *2: 1194 *3: 1195 4: 1196

Purchase Order1194Vendor#: C123CANDY MANUFACTURERBuyer:DaleWarning: This PO is already being received



The wave which you have selected, or to which the purchase order you have selected belongs, is displayed at the top of the screen.

2. To begin receiving products for the wave, press [F2], and see the procedures in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33.

STOPPING AND RESTARTING A CONTAINER

You can stop and restart a container, so that more than one receiver can receive goods in a single container at any time. You can stop receiving a container by pressing [F1] at any point during the receiving process.

You can restart a container at any point during the receiving process. However, once the purchase orders on a container have been closed and uploaded, the container is no longer available in Sage Accpac WMS, and cannot be restarted.

> To restart a container:

1. In the main receiving screen, if the Container prompt is not displayed, press [F7] to start container receiving. You are prompted to enter the container reference number.

RECEIVE W: 1001

Enter Product #


RECV

F2-START

Wave InformationOrders: 0Lines: 0Units: 0Container:

3 1


2. Scan or enter the container number and press ENTER. A warning message appears.

3. Press Y to restart that container, or N to cancel. The Wave Information screen is displayed, showing the total number of POs, lines, and units in the container.

4. To begin receiving products for the container, press [F2], and see the procedures in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33.

WARNING:SOME POON THE CONTAINER ALREADY WAVEDOR RECEIVED!CONTINUE (Yes/No)?

F2-START

Wave InformationOrders: 2Lines: 3Units: 38Container:1000RESTARTING



SELECTING PRODUCTS IN THE WAVE

Once you have started your wave, you begin selecting the products to receive. Products are then received into the warehouse as described in “Checking-in Products” on page 39 and later, you put the product away to a temporary or permanent storage bin, as described in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

There are three ways to select a product to be received:

• By selecting it from a list.

• By searching for it by keyword.

• By scanning the product.

Each method is described in the following procedure.

If you need to correct the quantity, packsize, or other information for an item you have received, follow the procedure in “Correcting a Receipt” on page 44. If unordered products arrive with a shipment, and you are allowed to receive these into the warehouse, follow the procedure in “Receiving Unordered Products” on page 42.

Finally, your warehouse will have a policy for handling short- or over-shipped quantities, and your system will be configured to use codes to handle these appropriately. In the procedures in this chapter, receivers are allowed to receive both short-shipped and over-shipped items, and all default receiving codes are used.

> To select products to be received:

1. Create a wave of purchase orders, by following any of the procedures in “Starting a Wave of Purchase Orders” on page 19.

3 3


2. At the Enter Product # prompt, do one of the following:

Select a product from one of the cartons and scan the product’s barcode label, or enter its product number and press ENTER. If you scan an unrecognized barcode, you are prompted to create a product cross-reference. To create a cross-reference, enter Y, and at the Product prompt, enter an existing product number; otherwise, enter N and re-scan the barcode or enter the product number.

To display a list from which you can select products, press ENTER. A list is displayed of all products available to be received in the wave, by product description.

Optionally, press [F4] to display products by product number. Press [F4] to toggle back to display products by description.

If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of products, and press the number corresponding to the product you want to receive first. If your

To search for products by keyword, press [F2]. You are prompted to enter a keyword.

Enter part of the product’s description or a couple of letters that may be included in the product you want to search for. The system displays each instance found on a PO that matches your search. In the example below, the word “Gum” was entered, and the following results are displayed:

Receive 1/1Select Item1:DoubleMint Gum2:TicTac Freshmint3:Big Red4:Breath Savers Spear5:Spearmint Gum6:Juicy Fruit

Receive 1/1Select Item1:LF3122:LF4083:LF5224:LF5515:LF2116:LF311

RECEIVEEnter Keyword

Keyword 1/1Select Item1:Doublemint Gum 2:Spearmint Gum3:Doublemint Gum



If any special instructions have been defined for the product, they are displayed. Press ENTER to continue.

3. If you are prompted to enter an expiry date for the product, enter it in the required format, and press ENTER.

4. To receive the products into the warehouse, see “Checking-in Products” on page 39.

product appears on more than one PO, a list of these is displayed.

If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of POs, and press the number corresponding to the PO against which you want to receive your selected product. In this situation, you may need to refer to the paperwork to determine the correct PO.

Press the number corresponding to the product which you want to receive.

RECEIVE 1/1Purchase Order1:11942:1195

3 5


RANDOM RECEIVING

When products arrive at the warehouse, those products may not be sorted by purchase order. Rather than have the warehouse staff sort the products, it may be easier to receive a product and let Sage Accpac WMS find a purchase order on which the product is included. This is referred to as random receiving because the products arrive ‘randomly’, rather than being sorted by purchase order. The random receiving procedure consists of the following steps:

1. Initiate the receipt by selecting a product. WMS finds open purchase order(s) on which the product is includes. The products can be received against any open PO.

2. Once a PO is selected for the product, you continue using the ‘receive by purchase order’ method of receiving, as described in steps 3 to 6, below.

3. Receive quantities. Products can be received either by units or by case, depending on your configuration. Receiving quantities is described in “Checking-in Products” on page 39.

4. Put away products to a temporary or permanent location.There are various methods from which you can choose to help you determine where to put your received products. All are described in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

5. Repeat the process for all products on the purchase order.

6. If your warehouse policy requires you to close purchase orders when you are finished receiving them (rather than having the dispatcher close them), close the purchase order for which you have received products. Procedures for closing POs are provided in “Closing a Purchase Order” on page 54.

If you need to stop or restart a purchase order, you can do so at any time; follow the procedure in “Stopping and Restarting a PO” on page 29.



> To random receive:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Random Receiving, and press ENTER.You are prompted for a product.

2. At the Enter Product # prompt, do one of the following:

RECEIVEEnter Product # F2: Keyword Search

F9: Complete

Scan the product’s barcode label, or enter its product number and press ENTER.

To search for products by keyword, press [F2]. You are prompted to enter a keyword.

Enter part of the product’s description or a couple of letters that may be included in the product you want to search for. The system displays each instance found on a PO that matches your search. In the example below, the word “Gum” was entered, and the following results are displayed:

Press the number corresponding to the product which you want to receive.

RECEIVEEnter Keyword

Keyword 1/1Select Item1:Doublemint Gum 2:Spearmint Gum3:Doublemint Gum

3 7


3. If the product is included on more than one purchase order, those purchase orders are listed on the screen.

4. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of purchase orders. Press the number corresponding to the PO number you want to select.

The product name, quantity ordered, and quantity received (0 to start) are displayed. If you are receiving by case, the default receiving packsize is also displayed. (This is 0 if none has been defined) .

5. Continue checking-in and putting-away the product as described in “Checking-in Products” on page 39 and “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

6. When the product is put away, you will be prompted for the next product in purchase order. Continue checking-in and putting-away until all products in the purchase order are finished.

7. Complete the purchase order according to the policy in your warehouse, as described in “Closing a Purchase Order” on page 54.

RECEIVEPurchase Order1:1000193 Spearmint2:1000198 Spearmint3:1000283 Spearmint4:1000286 Spearmint4:1000288 Spearmint4:1000300 Spearmint

LF211 Spearmint Gum

O 48 R 0Q per P:(Default: 12)



CHECKING-IN PRODUCTS

Once you select the product to receive (and any applicable purchase order information in random receiving), you can begin checking them into the warehouse. When you finish receiving a product, you put the product away to a temporary or permanent storage bin, as described in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

Your system will be configured to receive by case or by unit. Although the configuration used in this manual is to receive by case, both processes are described.

> To receive products into the warehouse:

1. Select products to receive as described in “Selecting Products in the Wave” on page 33 or as described in “Random Receiving” on page 36.

2. For the first product selected, the product name, quantity ordered, and quantity received (0 to start) are displayed. If you are receiving by case, the default receiving packsize is also displayed. (This is 0 if none has been defined; for information on setting these, see “Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes” on page 358.)

3. If you are receiving by case, at the Q per P prompt, enter the packsize in which the product has arrived, or press ENTER to accept the default.

Note: If you plan to move product immediately to pick bins, rather than storing it in overstock bins, be sure to enter a packsize that can be accepted into pick bins.

LF211 Spearmint Gum


Total quantity ordered for this wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving).

Quantity received so far.

Default receiving packsize (for case receiving).

3 9


The number of cases or units expected in the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving) is displayed.

4. Count the number of cases or units that have actually arrived, enter the quantity received, and press ENTER.

5. If you are prompted for a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, scan the barcode containing the attribute number, or enter the number and press ENTER.

6. If you are prompted to print labels, do one of the following:

LF211 Spearmint Gum

O 10000 R 0Q per P:2500#Packs:(Default: 4)

Total number of packs or units expected in this wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving).

ATT

Enter the number of overstock labels you would like to print, and press ENTER.

Press [F8] to print product labels. When prompted for the SKU#, if you want to print the customer’s product number on this label, enter the number and press ENTER; otherwise, press ENTER to leave this field blank. If you are prompted to enter a packsize and/or a number of packs (for packaged/bagged goods), enter the desired values at the prompts and press ENTER each time. When prompted for the number of labels, enter the quantity of labels you want, and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to skip printing labels.



7. If you entered more than was expected, and you are prompted to accept the quantity, press Y to receive the over-shipped item, or N to cancel it.

If you entered less than was expected, when prompted to enter a completion code, enter one of the following defaults (your warehouse may not use all of them), or press ENTER if you are unsure whether there is more product to be received.

If this is an RMA receipt, you are prompted to enter a status for the returned goods. (Your choices will be determined by your configuration.)

Press the number corresponding to the selection you want, and press ENTER. If you selected an option that indicates that the product should not be returned to inventory, the COMPLETED message is displayed at the bottom of the screen for the product; repeat the procedure for the next product in the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving).

8. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to put away the product. Follow the procedure in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

Code Use to...

S or Y Confirm that the quantity you entered is correct, but mark the shipment complete anyway.

N Cancel the quantity you entered, and return to the previous screen.

I Confirm that the quantity you entered is correct, but that the product was shipped short.

B Confirm that the quantity you entered is correct, but that the product was shipped short, and a back order should be created for this item.

RMA Code: 1: OK - Good Condition2: DS - Damaged

RMA

4 1


RECEIVING UNORDERED PRODUCTS

If products have arrived with a shipment, but do not appear on a PO, and you are allowed to receive them into the warehouse, you can open a miscellaneous adjustment to do so.

> To receive unordered products:

1. At the Enter Product # prompt, press [F7]. You are prompted to identify the unordered product.

At the Product prompt, scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.

If more than one product matches the barcode you scanned, you are prompted to select the correct product. To select the product, follow any of the steps described in “Identifying Products” on page 10.

The adjustment screen is displayed.

2. Press 1 to move this product into the warehouse.

3. Continue by following the procedure in “Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse” on page 331.

RECEIVERef:1194PRODUCT

RECEIVERef:1194LF600Breath Savers Winter

1 - In 2 - Out



STOPPING A RECEIPT

When you stop the receipt of a regular product, WMS automatically cancels the received quantity for the item, if you entered it previously, and resets the quantity to 0. However, when you stop the receipt of a product with unique attributes, such as serial numbers, WMS keeps the quantity of the items you have already scanned.

1. At any point while you are receiving a product, press [F1].

If you pressed [F1] from a screen prompting you for a product attribute, you are prompted to confirm that you want to stop the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving).

2. Press Y and ENTER.

You are returned to the Enter Product # prompt.

LF211 0Spearmint Gum

Only 1 of 2400 received OKto quit (Yes/No)?

ATT

4 3


CORRECTING A RECEIPT

If you find that you need to correct the receipt of an item on a PO, you can do so at any time before the PO has been uploaded.

> To correct the receipt of a product:

1. If necessary, restart the wave containing the PO or the PO you want to correct, by using any of the methods described in “Stopping and Restarting a PO” on page 29.

2. At the Enter Product # prompt, scan the barcode label of the product to be modified, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the correction.

3. Enter one of the following:

Option Use to...

Y Receive additional quantities of the product. This option maintains the original quantity received, and adds the new quantity you specify. Continue by following the steps in “Checking-in Products” on page 39.

N Cancel the correction. The original quantity you entered will remain the same.

M Cancel the original quantity received for this product, and specify a new quantity. This option zeroes the original quantity received, and replaces it with the new quantity you specify. Continue by following the steps in “Checking-in Products” on page 39.

LF551 Breathsavers Spearmint

O 10000 R 10000ALREADY RECEIVEDMODIFY ?CONFIRM (Y/N/M)

Total number of packs in the original order.

Total number of packs already received.



RECEIVING WITHOUT A PURCHASE ORDER

If your system is configured to allow it, you can use non-PO receiving to receive products that do not belong to a PO, and ‘create’ a new PO containing these products. Note, however, that although you create a purchase order number to identify the receipt in WMS, the data is uploaded to the accounting system as a miscellaneous adjustment; no actual PO is uploaded.

Non-PO receiving is also used in many warehouses to set up the system initially, by ‘receiving’ products to bins. This identifies the bins used in the warehouse to the system, as well as the products that are contained in them.


> To non-PO receive:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Non-PO Receiving, and press ENTER.

If your warehouse supports multiple clients/companies, you are prompted to enter the client name. Do one of the following:

• If you want to receive only the products for a specific client, enter the client name/number and press ENTER.

• If you want to receive products for all clients, simply press ENTER.

2. The Non-PO Receive screen is displayed. You are prompted to create a new purchase order.

3. Enter a reference number for the new PO and press ENTER.

Non-PO RECEIVEPurchase Order

f1: Exit

3PL

4 5




You are prompted to enter the first product to be received.

6. Scan the barcode label of the product you are receiving, or enter the product number and press ENTER. If you scan an unrecognized barcode, you are prompted to create a product cross-reference. To create a cross-reference, enter Y, and at the Product prompt, enter an existing product number; otherwise, enter N and re-scan the barcode or enter the product number.

7. If you are prompted to enter an expiry date for the product, enter it in the required format, and press ENTER.

The product name, quantity ordered (normally 0 in a non-PO receipt), and quantity received are displayed. If your system is configured to receive by case, the default receiving packsize is also displayed (0 if none has been defined; for information, on setting these, see “Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes” on page 358).

Non-PO RECEIVEEnter Product #

F9: complete

LF211 Spearmint Gum


Quantity ordered

Quantity received

Default receiving packsize (if receiving by case)



8. If you are receiving by case, at the Q per P prompt, enter the packsize in which the product has arrived.

Note: If you plan to move product immediately to pick bins, rather than storing it in overstock bins, be sure to enter a packsize that can be accepted into pick bins.

Since this product was not on a purchase order, the default number of cases or units is displayed as 0.

9. Count the number of cases or units that have actually arrived, enter the quantity received, and press ENTER.

10. If you are prompted for a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, scan the barcode containing the attribute number, or enter the number and press ENTER.

11. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to put away the product. Follow the procedure in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

LF211 Spearmint Gum

O 0 R 0Q per P:2500#Packs:(Default: 0)

ATT

4 7


PUTTING AWAY PRODUCTS

Once you have received products, you put them away to a temporary or permanent storage bin. If you are not actually putting the products away physically, you assign them to a temporary location, such as a receiving or returned materials area. Putaway drivers can then move the stock with the Direct Move or Restock functions. (For information on these, see “Moving/Putting Away Inventory” on page 65.)

For warehouses that use license plates, at this point, when you putaway products in temporary or permanent bins, you can create new license plates or add the products to existing license plates. When you are asked to enter a bin into which you receive the product(s), if you enter a license plate number instead of bin number, the system will recognize these as a license plated products. Prior to entering a license plate, you can optionally print a license plate label, which you can then scan as the license plate number at the bin prompt.


> To put away products:

1. After you have received products as described in “Checking-in Products” on page 39 or in “Receiving without a Purchase Order” on page 45, you are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to put away the product.

LF211 Spearmint Gum

Bin:To Bin>#Packs:4 of 2500



2. Optionally, if you were not prompted to print product labels, and would like to do so, do any of the following

To print overstock labels for the received cases, press [F4]. When prompted for the number of overstock labels, enter the quantity, and press ENTER. You are returned to the putaway screen.

If you are planning to break open the cases into units for putaway, and want to print product unit labels, press [F8]. When prompted for the SKU#, if you want to print the customer’s product number on this label, enter the number and press ENTER; otherwise, press ENTER to leave this field blank. If you are prompted to enter a packsize and/or a number of packs (for packaged/bagged goods), enter the desired values at the prompts and press ENTER each time. When prompted for the number of product labels, enter the quantity of labels you want, and press ENTER. You are returned to the putaway screen.

4 9


3. At the Bin prompt, do one of the following:

If you are putting away the product to an overstock or temporary receiving location, or know a valid pick bin to which you want to put away all or some of the received product, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the bin you entered does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

If you are receiving by unit, or have received

product in packsizes that may be stored in pick bins, and want to find the most suitable bin into which to put away the product, press [F2] to do a bin query and follow any of the procedures in “Finding Homes for Products” on page 110.

If you want to use license plates, enter a license plate number instead of a bin.

Optionally, press [F9] to print a license plate label. The next sequential license plate is printed.

Scan or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. For an existing license plate, the screen displays the bin associated with the license plate.

If the license plate you entered does not exist, you are prompted to create the new license plate; Press Y to add the license plate or N not to add the license plate. If you press Y, you are asked to assign the license plate to bin. This is the bin into which you will put the products. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin, to which you can respond with a either a bin or license plate.

PUT



Note: Refer to “Bin Restrictions” on page 53 to understand some of the constraints that may affect the bin into which you put the product(s) you receive.

You are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to put away to this bin.

4. At the #Packs prompt, enter the number of packs you want to put away to this bin and press ENTER. (You do not have to put away all packs to the same bin.) A message is displayed, indicating that the product has been added to that bin.

5. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are receiving to this bin.

LF211 Spearmint Gum

Bin :BULK1#Packs>#Packs:4 of 2500

LF211 Spearmint Gum

Bin:To Bin>#Packs:3 of 2500MOVED

ATT

5 1


6. If you did not enter the full quantity of packs received in the first bin, repeat steps 3 to 5 for all remaining packs to be put away. The COMPLETED message is displayed at the bottom of the screen when all packs are put away.

7. To continue putting away products until all products are finished:

RECEIVE W: 1001

Enter Product #

F2 - Keyword SearchF3 - Recv LabelsF9 - CompleteCOMPLETED

OR

RECEIVE

Enter Product #

F2 - Keyword Search

F9 - CompleteCOMPLETED

OR

Non-PO RECEIVEEnter Product #

F9: Complete

COMPLETE

For purchase order receiving:

Repeat the procedure for each product in the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving). When all products have been received, a message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Note: If you are receiving by container, the message None left in cont is displayed. This does not mean that the purchase order is

complete, however, as remaining lines on the PO could be arriving via another container.

For non-PO receiving:

Repeat steps 6 to 11 in “Receiving withoutPurchase Order” on page 45 for all productyou want to receive on this ‘PO’.

RECEIVE W: 1001

Enter Product #

F2-Keyword SearchF3-Recv LabelsF9-CompleteNONE LEFT

or

RECEIVE

Enter Product #

F2-Keyword Search

F9-CompleteNONE LEFT

RECV




BIN RESTRICTIONS

Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them, based on their type. For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in another pick bin.

For warehouses that use license plates, there are additional restrictions to consider when creating a new license plates, or adding products to existing license plates. There are license plate-specific rules that are applied to bins; for example, some bins may not be configured to keep license plate information (i.e., the bin is configured to ‘kill’ license plates). There are also rules for acceptable product mixing within a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a product cannot exist in two different packsizes in a single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and ‘free’ (non-licence plate) formats at the same time.

If the policy in your warehouse is for the dispatcher to close all POs in a batch at the end of the day, so that you do not need to close the PO, press [F1] or ENTER to exit the receiving function.

If the policy in your warehouse is to allow you to close POs individually at receiving, follow the procedure in “Closing a Purchase Order” on page 54.

5 3


CLOSING A PURCHASE ORDER

Closing a purchase order uploads a receipt confirmation to the accounting system, and makes it unavailable for further processing in WMS.

You can close a purchase order at any time, whether or not you have received all items on it. Note, however, that if you close a purchase order before all items are received, the purchase order is marked as shipped complete, and you will not be able to access it again.

Note: If you are receiving by container, be aware that the container may only arrive with some of the lines of the purchase orders on it. Be careful not to close purchase orders on containers until you are sure that all lines have been received.

> To close a purchase order:

1. At the Enter Product # prompt, press [F9] to close the purchase order against which you were receiving products. If you have missed any items, you are prompted to confirm the closure.


RECV

RECEIVE W: 1001

Some items have not been recv’d

F2 - ResumeF9 - Complete

OR

RECEIVE

Some items have not been recv’d

F2 - ResumeF9 - Complete

To continue receiving remaining products for this purchase order, press [F2]. You are returned to the Enter Product # prompt.

If all the products have been received, or to close the PO without the missing items, press [F9].



One of the following messages is displayed:

3. Press ENTER to return to the receiving screen. Repeat the procedure for all products you need to receive.

4. Press [F1] to return to the main Receiving menu.

QUICK CONTAINER RECEIVING

Quick container receiving lets the receiver check in an entire container or purchase order with one scan, rather than going through all the products in the shipment. However, this method of receiving requires a high level of confidence that the expected product and quantity matches the stock that is actually delivered. Using quick container receiving, all products in the container or purchase order are received to the same bin.

Quick Container receiving is also an effective way of license plating all the products in a container or purchase order at one time to a single license plate.

For purchase order receiving, the message indicates that receipt confirmation will be uploaded to the accounting system, and purchase order information is displayed.

For non-PO receiving, the message indicates that the receipt is complete.

RECEIVE W: 1001CANDY COVendor#: C123Purchase Order1194Dale

COMPLETED

or

RECEIVECANDY COVendor#: C123Purchase Order1194Dale

COMPLETED

NON-PO RECEIVE

COMPLETED

RECV

5 5


If you need to receive items in the container to different license plates or bins, or if you would like to verify individual items in the container or purchase order later, you can do one of the following:

• Do a quick container receive to a license plate assigned to a temporary bin location and later direct move the license plate to the permanent location as described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

• Do a quick container receive to a temporary location and later direct move products into their respective license plates.

• Do a quick container receive to a license plate and later move products out of the license plate to different licence plates, as required.

• Do a quick container receive to a license plate and later, the license-plated shipment can undergo detailed receiving in the warehouse, by creating a transfer purchase order, as described in “Creating Transfer Purchase Orders” on page 62. If extra items are in the shipment, they can be received using non-PO receiving; missing items can be adjusted out of inventory, as described in “Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse” on page 334.

> To quick container receive:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Quick Container, and press ENTER.

The Quick Receive screen with the CONTAINER prompt is displayed.

QUICK RECEIVE

CONTAINER



2. At the Container prompt, scan or enter either a container reference number or a purchase order number and press ENTER. Details of the container/purchase order are displayed.

3. Optionally, press [F2] to view the items in the container/purchase order. Each line in the container/purchase order is displayed and shows the product, quantity and packsize ordered. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of lines in the container/purchase order. To return to the Quick Receive screen, press ENTER.

QUICK RECEIVECNTR005TO BIN:

144 Items in 9 Lines

CBTR005 1/2

1: LF407 2.00*62: LF409 1.00*33: LF522 3.00*64: LF311 1.00*65: LF211 5.00*126: LF600 5.00*1

5 7


4. At the on the TO BIN prompt, on the Quick Receive screen, do one of the following:

5. When you enter a valid putaway bin, the following message is displayed:

The quick container receive function receives every open line in the container. It does not process lines marked with S (complete) or B (received short, but requiring back ordering of the missing items). The received quantity is 100% and the packsize is the packsize of the ordered goods.

6. To quick receive another container, repeat steps 2 to 5.

7. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Receiving menu.

If you are putting away all the products in the container or the purchase order to an overstock or temporary receiving location, or if you know a valid pick bin to which you want to put away all the products, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the bin you entered does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

To add all the products in the container or the purchase order to a license plate, scan or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. For an existing license plate, the screen displays the bin associated with the license plate.

If the license plate you, entered does not exist, you are prompted to create the new license plate; press Y to add the license plate or N not to add the license plate. If you press Y, you are asked to assign the license plate to bin. This is the bin into which you will put the products. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin, to which you can respond with a either a bin or license plate.

QUICK RECEIVE

CONTAINER

SUCCEED!



COMPLETING THE QUICK RECEIVE

When quick container receiving is successful, the purchase order(s) used to create the container are closed only if every line in the purchase order is completed. When all the lines in the purchase order(s) that have been successfully received, the purchase order will be ready to upload to the host, or automatically uploaded depending on your configuration.

HANDING INCOMPLETE QUICK RECEIVING

The following describes the circumstances in which a purchase order(s) will not be completed, and how they can be closed.

Purchase Order is not completed if... Can be completed by...

A line in the purchase order has ben marked B (received short, but requiring back ordering of the missing items)

Using the F9 – Complete function on the handheld as described in “Closing a Purchase Order” on page 54, or by the dispatcher from Web Dispatch, depending on the policy in your warehouse.

If the container contains a purchase order(s) which overlaps other containers, which have not yet been received

Receiving the containers in which there are open lines from the purchase order.

5 9


RECEIVING BY ASN LABEL

ASN receiving requires SSCC-18 shipping labels created using the Sage Accpac WMS Vendor Portal. The receiver checks-in the carton simply by scanning the track-trace number. Since these are labels created by the Vendor Portal, WMS can identify the all the information about the contents of the carton from the track-trace number. Depending on your system configuration, the track-trace number may be captured as the license plate for the contents of the carton during check-in.

> To ASN receive:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to ASN Receiving, and press ENTER.

The ASN Receive screen with the ASN Label prompt is displayed.

2. At the ASN Label prompt, scan or enter the track-trace number on the label and press ENTER. Details of the carton contents are displayed.

VPCD

ASN RECEIVE

ASN LABEL:

ASN RECEIVE00099999991000000450

TO BIN:144 Items in 9 Lines



3. Optionally, press [F2] to view the items in the carton. Each line in the carton is displayed and shows the product, quantity and packsize ordered. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of lines in the carton. To return to the ASN Receive screen, press ENTER.

4. At the TO BIN prompt on the ASN Receive screen, go to an overstock, temporary receiving location, or valid pick bin to which you want to put away all the products. Scan the barcode label on the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the bin you entered does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

5. After you enter a bin, the contents of the carton are added to that bin and depending on your system configuration, the carton contents are license plated with the track-trace number.

6. The ASN RECEIVING screen re-displays. Scan the next carton, or press [F1] to return to the main Receiving menu.

COMPLETING THE ASN RECEIVE

When ASN receive is successful, the purchase order(s) used to create the labels are not closed even if every line in the purchase order is completed. The purchase order needs to be closed either in Web Dispatch or on the handheld, depending on the policy of your warehouse.

100000045 1/2

1: LF407 2.00*62: LF409 1.00*33: LF522 3.00*64: LF311 1.00*65: LF211 5.00*126: LF600 5.00*1

6 1


CREATING TRANSFER PURCHASE ORDERS

A transfer purchase order is used to receive goods that are already in inventory into the warehouse. Transfer purchase orders are processed in a similar way to regular purchase orders, except that the host system’s inventory quantities are not increased as a result of receiving the transfer purchase order. Consider the following examples:

• Sage Accpac WMS’s warehouse/site transfer functionality allows the transfer of products from one warehouse site to another warehouse site. Since the goods are already in inventory, the warehouse transfer function changes the location of the stock, but not the quantities of the stock. Transfer purchase orders are used to receive the goods into a destination warehouse, but the inventory quantities are not increased as a result of ‘receiving’ the transfer purchase order. For more information about warehouse/site transfer, see “Warehouse/Site Transfer” in Chapter 2, “Understanding ACCPAC WMS Processes” in the Sage Accpac WMS manual.

• Goods in a container in the yard or on the water, can be a ‘received’ to a license plate using quick container receiving or ASN receiving (see “Quick Container Receiving” on page 55 and/or “Receiving By ASN Label” on page 60), perhaps even before they arrive at the warehouse. This updates the host’s accounting system inventory with the received quantities. Then, the receiver can create a transfer purchase order when the goods are unloaded at the warehouse and the goods could be ‘received’ a second time (the regular detail-receiving), to verify the contents of the container. However, when the transfer purchase is received, the host’s accounting system inventory will not be updated. Any discrepancies found as result of the detailed check-in can be handled as adjustments. See Chapter 11, “Adjusting Inventory” on page 325

Using the Receiving menu on the handheld, the receiver in the warehouse can create a purchase order from a license plate number. Note that the license plate points to a bin location, and when you create a transfer PO from a license plate, the transfer purchase order includes all items in license plates in the location (not just the items in the carton being scanned). For example, if a bin contains a total of 122 items in 17 license plates, even though you scan only a single license plate, the purchase order that is created includes all the 122 items. Of course, if multiple license plates are detected, you will be asked to confirm the create transfer PO operations.

LOC

RECV

VPCD



> To create a transfer purchase order from a license plate number:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Create Transfer PO, and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter a license plate.

2. At the LICENSE PLATE prompt, scan or enter the license plate for which you want to create a transfer purchase order. The bin associated with the license plate displays. Since the transfer purchase order will include all items in that bin, the total number of license plates and items in the bin are displayed. You are asked to confirm your choice.

3. Press Y to create the transfer PO or N to enter a different license plate. If you press Y, you are asked to enter a purchase order number.

CREATE TRANSFER PO

LICENSE PLATE:

CREATE TRANSFER POBIN: B007

20 Items in 5 license Create Transfer PO?Yes/No

CREATE TRANSFER POBIN: B007PO:

6 3


4. At the PO prompt, enter a number for the purchase order you are creating. You are prompted for the destination warehouse.

5. Enter the destination warehouse and press ENTER. If you are creating a transfer PO to detail receive items already in the warehouse, the destination warehouse can be the current warehouse. You will receive a message that creation of the Transfer Purchase Order succeeded.

6. To create another transfer purchase order repeat steps 2 to 5. Otherwise, press [F1] to exit and you are returned to the Receiving menu.

CREATE TRANSFER POBIN: B007PO:P00123TO WAREHOUSE



3 MOVING/PUTTING AWAY INVENTORY

UNDERSTANDING MOVING AND PUTAWAY FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes functions you can use in conjunction with receiving or replenishment, to move inventory within the warehouse. All of these functions do not actually affect the inventory count in your warehouse, but simply move products from one in-warehouse bin to another. These functions are also used for managing license plates within the warehouse. Your system may be configured to upload updated bin locations to the host system; otherwise, the host system may not be notified when any of these functions are performed.

This chapter describes the following functions:

• Looking up the contents of bins. This is a generic function you can use when managing inventory in the warehouse. It lists the products that are currently stored in a selected bin, and displays the quantities and statuses of a selected product for all bins in which it is stored in the warehouse. Described in “Looking Up Bin Contents” on page 67.

• Moving products inside the warehouse. You can use the Direct Move function at any time, to put away products that have been received from a receiving area to overstock or pick bins, or simply to relocate stock in different bins in the warehouse, for any purpose. Described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

6 5


• Moving serialized products to a bin using the Move Serial function. The Move Serial function is a faster and easier way of moving serialized products into a different bin. Described in “Moving Serialized Products” on page 115.

• Reserving stock to prevent it from being allocated (if you have supervisor permissions only). You can access the Reserve Stock function from the Direct Move function. Described in “Reserving and Unreserving Inventory” on page 101.

• Restocking returned products to bins in the warehouse. For warehouses that process large volumes of returned goods, you can use the Restock function to move the products to the appropriate pick bins in one step. Described in “Restocking Inventory” on page 107.

• Moving license plates from one bin to another bin. For warehouses that use license plates, you can move the entire contents of a license plate using the Direct Move function. Described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

In addition, the Direct Move function can be used for adding/ removing products from license plates.

• Finding homes for products for putaway and replenishment functions. The bin query function linked to from Direct Move In, Receiving, and other functions, provides suggested directed putaway suggestions. Described in “Finding Homes for Products” on page 110.

PUT

6 6 C H A P T E R 3 M O V I N G / P U T T I N G A W A Y I N V E N T O R Y


LOOKING UP BIN CONTENTS

The Bin Lookup function allows you to find out what products are currently assigned to a selected bin, and to view information about the statuses of selected products.

> To look up a bin:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. Depending on the functions available on the main menu, you may need to press ENTER or [F3] for Next Page of menus to find the Warehouse Maint menu item. When selected, the Warehouse Maintenance menu is displayed.

2. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Bin Lookup. You are prompted to enter the bin whose contents you want to look up.

WAREHOUSE MAINT 1/21-Assign Pickbins2-Bin Lookup3-Check License Plate4-Product Xref5-Formal Packsizes6-Del Sticky Homes7-Restock

BIN LOOKUPBin:

6 7


3. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or at the Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. The products, quantities and packsizes that are currently stored in the selected bin are displayed.

4. Optionally, to view details for any product in the bin, press ENTER to display additional screens of products, and press the number corresponding to the product for which you want to see details. The product number and name, total quantity in the bin, and total unallocated quantity of the product in the bin are displayed.

C1 1/1Products:1:LF211 23x252:LF312 2X100

BIN LOOKUPBin:

BIN> C1LF312Doublemint Gum

200/ 0

Total quantity in the bin.

Total unallocated quantity in the bin.



5. To view additional details for the product, press [F2]. Quantities of product in the warehouse are listed by their status.

6. Press ENTER to return to the list of all products assigned to this bin.

7. To view the statuses of other products, repeat steps 4 and 5.

8. To exit this function, press [F1] until you are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

MOVING INVENTORY

A direct move is a transfer of stock from one in-warehouse location to another, either pick bin or bulk/overstock. The Direct Move function is a generic method of moving stock within the warehouse, which does not affect the inventory count in the warehouse. In some cases, Sage AccpacWMS uploads a miscellaneous adjustment to the host system that simply updates the bin location for the moved product; in other cases, the host system never knows that products have been moved.

You can use the Direct Move function for various purposes such as putting away received or returned stock, moving stock from overstock bins to pick bins, or moving stock from any temporary/staging area to final storage bins in the warehouse. If your system is configured to allow it, you may also use the direct move to process replenishment requests (for more information on replenishment, see “Understanding Replenishment Functions” on page 117).

LF312Bin 1525Bulk 7500Held Alloc 500Held Short 0Held Repl 0UnAlloc 0TOTAL REQD 500

Total number of units in pick bins.

Total number of units in overstock bins.

Total number of units that are allocated to sales orders.

Total number of units that are short for sales orders.

Total number of units that are held for replenishment for sales orders.

Total number of units in all bins needed for unallocated orders.

Total number of units needed to fill all sales orders.

6 9


For warehouses that use license plates, the Direct Move function can be used for a variety of operations that let you to manage license plates in the warehouse. Direct Move can be used to move an entire license plate from one bin to another. When you move a license plate to a different bin, the license plate is reassigned to the new bin and the license plate is no longer associated with the first bin location. The Direct Move function can also be used to add and remove products from existing license plates.

If you have Supervisor privileges, you can also use the Direct Move function to reserve stock, which prevents it from being allocated to orders. For information, see “Reserving and Unreserving Inventory” on page 101.

There are two main ways of moving inventory:

• In two steps

In this method, you first move the stock out from a bin to a temporary system location, TRANSIT. Then, you move the stock in from the TRANSIT location to the desired bin. You typically use this method when different equipment is required, when you want to search for the best home for the product, when the out and in bins are situated at a distance from each other, or when stock needs to be broken down into smaller packsizes.

Note: In some warehouses, the system may be configured to only allow you to move in stock that you yourself have moved out initially.

• In one step

You typically use this method when the equipment required to move the stock is the same, when you already know to where you are moving the product, and when the out and in bins are situated close to each other.



For each method, in/out or one-step, you can also move products in three ways:

• By single product. In this method, you move a single product at a time.

• By pallet. In this method, you assemble a pallet-load of multiple products and then drop the whole pallet of products in the same bin, without having to re-scan all the items on the pallet. License plate information is preserved when you perform a pallet move.That means that if there are license plated products in the bin that is moved as part of the pallet move, the license plate information will be preserved in the destination bin.

• By license plate. In this method, you move all the products in a single license at one time.

To move products out from bins to the TRANSIT location, by single product, by pallet of products, or by license plate, see “Moving Products Out” on page 71.

To move products in from the TRANSIT location into new bins, by single product, by pallet of products, or by license plate, see “Moving Products In” on page 80.

To move products out from bins and into bins in one step, by single product, by pallet of products, or by license plate, see “Moving Products in One Step” on page 91.

MOVING PRODUCTS OUT

When you move stock out, there are three methods by which you can move products to the TRANSIT location:

• By product — In this method, you add products from different bins to the TRANSIT location, one product at a time, in the quantity you select. Use this method when you want to select the products and quantities to be moved. Follow the procedure in “Moving a Single Product Out” on page 72.

• By pallet — In this method, you move the total quantity of all available (unallocated) products in a single bin to the TRANSIT location. Use this method when you want to empty multiple products from a single bin. Follow the procedure in “Moving Multiple Products (Pallet Moving) Out” on page 76.

• By license plate — In this method, you move all products in a single license plate to the TRANSIT location. Use this method when you want to move the all the products in a license plate at one time, and to reassign the license plate to a new bin. Follow the procedure in “Moving a License Plate Out” on page 78.

7 1


MOVING A SINGLE PRODUCT OUT

> To move a single product out:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Overstock. The Overstock menu is displayed.

2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move. You are prompted to enter the product you want to move.

3. At the Product prompt, scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


OVERSTOCK 1/21-Direct Move2-Letdown Stock3-Fill Bins4-Label Printing5-Carton Route6-Move Serial

2-STEP PRODUCT MOVEProduct:

F2:1-Step F3:2-Step

F5: Pallet MoveF6 License Move



Pick bins in which the product is currently stored, for each of the first three standard packsizes, are displayed.

4. Optionally, if you want to print product labels, do the following:

5. Press 2 to move the product out of a bin. All the current locations for the product, as well as quantities and packsizes for each bin, are displayed. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed.

Stock that has been reserved by warehouse staff is indicated with a number sign (#) to the left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.

PRODUCT> LF408Tic Tac Freshmint

UNITSIZ2 A3SIZ3 B3 1-IN 2-OUT

To print product unit labels for the selected product, press [F8]. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want. Press ENTER to return to the Direct Move screen.

To print overstock (product case) labels for the selected product, press [F7]. At the Q per P prompt, enter the packsize you need for the product carton. Then, at the #Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want. Press ENTER to return to the Direct Move screen.

LF408 1/1Select: 1:A3 6*252:C2 8*253:B3 5*1004:BULK3 3*25006:N02 LP1234567

7 3


6. Optionally, to view the received or expiry dates (if applicable) of all inventory in each bin, press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.

7. To select a bin, go to it and scan its barcode label, or press the number corresponding to the bin and press ENTER. The bin you have selected and the number of packs in that bin are displayed. If your system is configured to do so, the maximum number of packs that can be removed is also displayed.

8. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs you want to move out of this bin, and press ENTER. If the product cannot be moved from this bin (because it has already been allocated to an order) a message is displayed.

9. If you receive such a message, enter another quantity, or press ENTER to return to the bin selection prompt and select another bin, by following steps 5 to 8.

LF408 1/1Select: 1:A3 02072:C2 02073:B3 02074:BULK3 02075:N02 0207


Pickbin: B3# Packs: 5To Remove:


Pickbin: B3# Packs: 5 To Remove:0 AVAILABLE!



10. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are moving out.

When your move is successful, the message MOVED is displayed, and the selected products are moved to the TRANSIT system location.

11. Do any of the following:

• To move additional quantities of this product from other bins out to the TRANSIT location, repeat steps 5 to 8 of this procedure.

• To move other products out, press [F1] to return to the first Direct Move screen, and repeat steps 3 to 8 of this procedure.

• To move the products you have moved to the TRANSIT location in to bin locations, follow any of the procedures in “Moving Products In” on page 80.

12. To exit this function, press [F1] twice. You are returned to the Overstock menu.


Pickbin: A3

1-IN 2-OUTMOVED

ATT

7 5


MOVING MULTIPLE PRODUCTS (PALLET MOVING) OUT

When you pallet move by bin, you move out all the available contents of one bin (i.e. all stock that is not currently reserved or allocated to orders) in one step.

> To move multiple products out:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Overstock. The Overstock menu is displayed

2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move.



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step




3. Press [F5] to select Pallet Move. The Pallet Move screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the bin from which you want to move all available (unallocated) product.

4. At the From Bin prompt, scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The available products are moved to the TRANSIT location, and the number of different products moved is displayed.

5. Optionally, to view the contents of the TRANSIT location so far, press [F8]. The products you have added to the TRANSIT location using the Pallet Out function are displayed. To return to the Pallet Move screen, press ENTER.

2-STEP PALLET MOVEFrom Bin:

F2:1-Step F3:2-StepF4:IN from TRANSITF5:Pallet MoveF6:License Move


F2:1-Step F3:2-StepF4:IN from TRANSITF5:Pallet MoveF6:License Move

5 MOVED

In TRANSIT 1/3Enter, f2-PgUp1:LF211 7x252:LF312 4x100 3:LF407 2x1004:LF600 6x255:LF211-L 2x256:LF408 7x25

7 7



• To move all contents of another bin to the TRANSIT location, repeat steps 4 and 5 of this procedure.

• To move the products you have moved to the TRANSIT location in to bin locations, follow any of the procedures in “Moving Products In” on page 80.


MOVING A LICENSE PLATE OUT

When you license plate move, you move all the products in the license plate out of the bin, all at one time. Moving the license plate assigns it to the bin to which it is moved.

> To move a license plate out:





F2:1-Step F3:2-Step




3. Press [F6] to select License Move. The License Move screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the license plate you want to move.

4. At the License Plate prompt, scan the barcode label of the license plate, or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. The licence plate and its current bin assignment are displayed for you to confirm the move to the TRANSIT location.

5. At the Yes/No prompt, press Y to confirm the move or, press N to reject the move and enter a different license plate.The products in the license plate are moved to the TRANSIT location, and the number of different products moved is displayed.

2-STEP LICENSE MOVELicense Plate:

F2:1-Step F3:2-Step

F5:Pallet MoveF6:License Move

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From B01To Bin TRANSITYes/No

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From B01To Bin TRANSIT3 ITEMS MOVEDPress ENTER

7 9



• To move another license plate to the TRANSIT location, repeat steps 4 and 5 of this procedure.

• To move the entire license plate you have moved to the TRANSIT location to a bin location, follow the procedures in “Moving a License Plate In” on page 88.


MOVING PRODUCTS IN

When you move stock in, there are three methods by which you can move products from the TRANSIT location:

• By product — In this method, you add selected products from the TRANSIT location, one product at a time, in the quantity you select. Use this method when you want to move the products to different bins. Follow the procedure in “Moving a Single Product In” on page 81.

• By pallet — In this method, you move all the products that you have added to the TRANSIT location using the Pallet Out function to a single bin. Use this method when you want to move multiple products into a bin that can accept them, such as a carton/overstock bin. Follow the procedure in “Moving Multiple Products (Pallet Moving) In” on page 85.

• By license plate — In this method, you move all the products in the license plate that was previously moved to the TRANSIT location to a new bin location. Use this method when you want to move the all the products in a license plate at one time, and to reassign the license plate to a new bin. Follow the procedure in “Moving a License Plate In” on page 88.

Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type. For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in another pick bin.



For warehouses that use license plates, there are additional restrictions to consider when you move a license plate to a new bin. There are license plate-specific rules that are applied to bins; for example, some bins may not be configured to keep license plate information. (i.e., the bin is configured to ‘kill’ license plates). There are also rules for acceptable product mixing within a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a product cannot exist in two different packsizes in a single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and ‘free’ (non-licence plate) formats at the same time.

MOVING A SINGLE PRODUCT IN

To move a product into a bin, it must have already been moved out to the TRANSIT location previously.

> To move a single product in:


2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move. You are prompted to enter the product you want to move.



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step


8 1





4. Press 1 to move the product in to a bin. If there is more than one packsize in the TRANSIT location, the quantities and packsizes for the TRANSIT location are displayed. If the product is part of a license plate, the license plate numbers are displayed.

5. Press ENTER to view additional screens of quantities, if necessary.



LF408 1/1Select: 1:TRANSIT 1*25002:TRANSIT 2*253:TRANSIT LP1234567



6. Optionally, to view the received or expiry dates (if applicable) of all inventory in the TRANSIT location, press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of dates, if necessary.

7. Press the number corresponding to the packsize you are moving in. You are prompted to enter a bin into which you want to move the inventory.

8. To select a bin, do one of the following:

LF408 1/1Location Date1:TRANSIT 07022:TRANSIT 07023:TRANSIT 0702


Packsize: 1 Pickslot:B3To Bin:

If you know a valid bin to which you want to move the product, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the To Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

If you want to find the most appropriate bin by doing a bin query, press [F2] and follow the procedure in

“Finding Homes for Products” on page 110.

PUT

8 3


9. If the bin you entered in step 8 does not already contain this product, or it is a random or carton bin, and you are prompted to select a packsize, press the number corresponding to the packsize you want to move in to this bin, and press ENTER, or press 6 to enter another packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.

Note: When you move products in, you can split or combine packs to create the packsizes you want. However, the packsize you specify must be a multiple of the original packsize that was moved out.

You are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin.

10. At the #Packs prompt, enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin, and press ENTER. (You do not need to move all packs to the same bin.) If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.


Loc’n: C1Qty:100*25# Packs:


Bin>Loc’n:

CONTAINS OTHER PROD



11. If you receive such a message, select another bin and quantity by following steps 7 to 10. When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the system has moved the product to the selected bin.


• To move more of this product from the TRANSIT location to a new bin, repeat steps 4 to 11.

• To move other products in, press [F1] to return to the first Direct Move screen, and repeat steps 3 to 11.


MOVING MULTIPLE PRODUCTS (PALLET MOVING) IN

To move multiple products into a bin location, they must have already been moved out to the TRANSIT location previously with Pallet Move Out.

Note: When you pallet-move multiple products into a bin, they must all be placed in the same bin. Therefore, you must be sure to pallet-move only into a carton-type bin.


UNITSIZ2 A3SIZ3 B3 1-IN 2-OUTMOVED REPLENISHED

8 5


> To move multiple products in from a pallet:


2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move

3. Press [F5] to select Pallet Move. The Pallet Move screen is displayed.



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step



F2:1-Step F3:2-StepF4: IN from TRANSITF5: Pallet MoveF6 License Move



4. Press [F4] to select pallet move IN from TRANSIT. You are prompted for the bin to which you want to move all the products from the TRANSIT location.

5. Optionally, to view the contents of the TRANSIT location, press [F6]. If necessary, press ENTER TO view additional screens of products. When done, press ENTER to return to the Pallet Move screen.

6. To select a bin to which you want to move the products, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the Loc’n prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.

MOVE PALLET IN

Loc’n:

PALLET MOVE 1/1Enter, f2-PgUp1:LF211 7x252:LF312 4x1003:Lf408 3X100

MOVE PALLET IN

Loc’n:

MUST BE MULTILOCATION!!!

8 7


7. If you receive such a message, select another bin. When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the products have been moved to the selected bin.

8. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Overstock menu.

MOVING A LICENSE PLATE IN

To move a license plate into a bin location, it must have already been moved out to the TRANSIT location previously with License Move Out.

> To move a license plate in:



F2:1-Step F3:2-StepF4: IN from TRANSITF5: Pallet MoveF6 License Move3 MOVED





3. Press [F6] to select License Move. The License Move screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the license plate you want to move.

4. At the License Plate prompt, scan the barcode label of the license plate, or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. You are prompted for the bin to which you want to move the license plate from the TRANSIT location.


F2:1-Step F3:2-Step



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step

F5:Pallet MoveF6:License Move

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From TRANSITTo Bin >

8 9


5. To select a bin to which you want to move the license plate, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the To Bin> prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

If the license plate cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.

6. If you receive such a message, select another bin. When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the license plate has been moved to the selected bin and displaying the number of different products moved.

7. Press ENTER to exit and press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From TRANSITTo Bin DO1CONTAINS OTHER PRODPress ENTER

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From TRANSITTo Bin B133 ITEMS MOVEDPress ENTER



MOVING PRODUCTS IN ONE STEP

To move a single product in one step, follow the procedure in “Moving a Single Product in One Step” on page 91.

To move multiple products in one step, follow the procedure in “Moving Multiple Products (Pallet Moving) in One Step” on page 96.

To move a license plate in one step, follow the procedure in “Moving a License Plate in One Step” on page 99.

MOVING A SINGLE PRODUCT IN ONE STEP

> To move a single product in one step:





F2:1-Step F3:2-Step


9 1


3. Press [F2] to activate one step moving. The 1-Step Product Move screen displays, and you are prompted to enter the product you want to move.

4. At the Product prompt, scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


Pick bins in which the product is currently stored, for each of the first three standard packsizes, are displayed, and you are prompted to enter the bin from which you want to move the product.


F2:1-Step F3:2-Step



UNITSIZ2 A3SIZ3 B3From Bin:



5. To select a bin, do one of the following:

If you know a valid bin from which you want to move the product, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER.

To view a list of bins in which the product is currently stored, press ENTER. All the current bins for the product, as well as quantities and packsizes for each bin, are displayed. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed.

Stock that has been reserved by warehouse staff is indicated with a number sign (#) to the left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.

Optionally, to view the received or expiry dates (if applicable) of all inventory in each bin, press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.

LF408 1/1Select: 1:A3 6*252:C2 8*253:B3 5*1004:BULK3 3*25005:N02 LP1234567

LF408 1/1Select: 1:A3 02072:C2 02073:B3 02074:BULK3 02075:N02 0207

9 3


6. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs you want to move out of this bin, and press ENTER. If the product cannot be moved from this bin, because it is reserved or allocated to a sales order, a message is displayed.

7. If you receive such a message, enter another quantity, or press ENTER to return to the bin selection prompt and select another bin, by following steps 5 and 6. When your move out is successful, you are prompted to enter a bin to which you want to move the product.


Loc’n: B3# Packs: 5 To Remove:0 AVAILABLE!


Suggest A06Move To:

Press the number corresponding to the bin from which you want to move the product, and press ENTER.The bin you selected and the number of packs in that bin are displayed.


Loc’n: B3# Packs: 5To Remove:



Note: Pick bins can have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type. For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in another pick bin.

8. Go to the desired bin and scan its barcode label, or at the Move To prompt, enter a bin number and press ENTER. If the bin does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

9. If the bin you entered in step 8 does not already contain this product, and you are prompted to select a packsize, press the number corresponding to the packsize you want to move into this bin and press ENTER, or press 6 to enter a different packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.

Note: When you move products in, you can split or combine packs to create the packsizes you want. However, the packsize you specify must be a multiple of the original packsize that was moved out.


10. If you receive such a message, select another bin.


Suggest A06Move To:

D Bin in use!

9 5


11. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are moving.

12. When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the system has moved the product to the selected bin.

13. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Overstock menu.

MOVING MULTIPLE PRODUCTS (PALLET MOVING) IN ONE STEP

One-step pallet moving removes all available contents from one bin to another.

Note: When you pallet move multiple products into a bin, they must all be placed in the same bin. Therefore, you must be sure to pallet move only to a carton-type bin.

> To move multiple products in one step:



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step

F5: Pallet MoveF6 License MoveMOVED!

ATT





3. Press [F2] to activate one step moving, then press [F5] to pallet move. The 1- Step Pallet Move screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the bin from which you want to move all available products.

4. At the From Bin prompt, scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to move the products.


F2:1-Step F3:2-Step



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step


MOVE PALLET INFrom Bin:B2Loc’n:

9 7


5. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the Loc’n prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.


6. If you receive such a message, select a new bin. When your move is successful, you are returned to the main Direct move screen, and a message is displayed, indicating the number of different products that were moved.

7. Press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.

MOVE PALLET INFrom Bin:B2Loc’n:

CONTAINS OTHER PROD


F2:1-Step F3:2-Step

F5: Pallet MoveF6 License Move2 MOVED



MOVING A LICENSE PLATE IN ONE STEP

One-step license plate moving moves all the products in the specified license plate from one bin to another. The license plate information is preserved in the move.

Note: In addition to regular bin restrictions, there are license plate-specific rules that are applied to bins; for example, some bins may not be configured to keep license plate information. (i.e., the bin is configured to ‘kill’ license plates). There are also rules for acceptable product mixing within a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a product cannot exist in two different packsizes in a single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and ‘free’ (non-licence plate) formats at the same time.

> To move the license plate in one step:





F2:1-Step F3:2-Step


9 9


3. Press [F2] to activate one step moving, then press [F6] to license move. The 1- Step License Move screen is displayed., and you are prompted to enter the license plate you want to move.

4. At the License Plate prompt, scan the barcode label of the license plate, or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. You are prompted for the bin to which you want to move the license plate.

5. To select a bin to which you want to move the license plate, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the To Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

If the license plate cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.


F2:1-Step F3:2-Step


LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From N01To Bin >

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From N01To Bin DO1CONTAINS OTHER PRODPress ENTER

1 0 0 C H A P T E R 3 M O V I N G / P U T T I N G A W A Y I N V E N T O R Y


6. If you receive such a message, select another bin. When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the license plate has been moved to the selected bin and displaying the number of different products that were moved.

7. Press ENTER to exit and press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.

RESERVING AND UNRESERVING INVENTORY

If you have the correct privileges, you can reserve inventory by selecting Reserve Stock in the Direct Move function. This function is typically used for products that need to be quarantined or inspected before being made available to regular inventory. When inventory is reserved, it is prevented from being allocated to sales orders. To reserve stock, follow the procedure in “Reserving Inventory” on page 102.

Again, provided you have Supervisor privileges, you can also use the Reserve Stock function to unreserve inventory that you have previously reserved, or that has been reserved by another user. To unreserve stock, follow the procedure in “Unreserving Inventory” on page 105.

LICENSE PLATE MOVELICENSE PLATE #:LP1234567From N01To Bin B133 ITEMS MOVEDPress ENTER

1 0 1


RESERVING INVENTORY

> To reserve inventory of a product:


2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move. You are prompted to enter the product you want to reserve.



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step






Pick bins in which the product is currently stored, for each of the first three standard packsizes, are displayed

4. Press [F9] to reserve stock of this product. All bins in which the product is currently stored are displayed, as well as the quantity and packsize for each bin. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed. Stock that has already been reserved by warehouse staff is indicated with a number sign (#) to the left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.



LF211 1/1Select:1:C1 13*25 2:D1 5*253:D1 4*1004:BULK1 4*25005:N01 LP1234567

1 0 3



6. Scan the barcode label of the bin whose inventory you want to reserve, or press the number corresponding to the appropriate bin and press ENTER. A message is displayed, indicating the quantity, packsize, and bin location for the product that you are reserving. You are prompted to enter a comment.

7. To confirm that you want to reserve the stock, enter a comment up to 16 characters long, and press ENTER; otherwise, press [F1] to cancel the reservation and return to the product selection screen.

If you confirmed the reservation, the message Reserved is displayed.

LF211 1/1Location Date 1:C1 02072:D1 02073:D1 02074:BULK1 02075:N01 0207


WILL BE RESERVEDC1 13*25Enter Comment

(f1 to cancel)


UNITSIZ2 A3SIZ3 B3 1-IN 2-OUTRESERVED



8. Press ENTER to return to the product selection screen.

9. To reserve additional products, repeat steps 3 to 7.


UNRESERVING INVENTORY

If you have the correct privileges, you can unreserve stock that has been reserved by yourself or by another user.

> To unreserve reserved inventory:


2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move. You are prompted to enter the product you want to unreserve.



F2:1-Step F3:2-Step


1 0 5





4. Press [F9] to unreserve stock of this product. All bins in which the product is currently stored are displayed. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed. Currently reserved stock is indicated with a number sign (#) to the left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.



LF408 1/1Select:1:C1 #13*25 2:D1 5*253:D1 4*1004:BULK1 4*25005:N01 LP1234567



5. Scan the barcode label of the bin whose inventory you want to unreserve, or press the number corresponding to the appropriate bin (marked with the #) and press ENTER. A message is displayed, confirming that the stock is no longer reserved.

6. Press ENTER to return to the product selection screen.

7. To unreserve additional products, repeat steps 3 to 5.

8. To exit this function, press F1 twice. You are returned to the Overstock menu.

RESTOCKING INVENTORY

The Restock function may be used to process product returns or even build-to-stock kits and packaging items. The Restock function moves the returned inventory from a ‘cart’ location to a bin where the product is currently stored. Thus the inventory must already have been received or adjusted into a cart location before you can restock it.

Once the inventory has been placed into a cart location, the Restock function takes you on a directed walk through the warehouse, in pick bin sequence, to return the products to the appropriate bins. Although you move all products on the cart at one time, you can put each product away separately to its appropriate bin.

Note: You can only use the Restock function to return product to a bin in which it is currently stored in the same packsize. (The system directs you to this bin.) If the product is not currently stored in such a bin, you cannot use the Restock function, but must use a different function, such as Direct Move (see “Moving Inventory” on page 69), or a miscellaneous adjustment (see “Adjusting Inventory” on page 325), to move it to a bin.


WILL BE RESERVEDC1 13*25This product is no longer reserved.

1 0 7


> To restock inventory:

1. From the main menu, press ENTER to view the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. The Warehouse Maintenance menu is displayed.

2. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Restock. You are prompted to enter the cart location from which you are moving the stock.

3. Scan the barcode label of the cart, or enter the cart number and press ENTER. The number of different products in the cart location you selected is displayed.


RESTOCK TO BIN

‘Cart’ Location>

RESTOCK TO BIN

Cart: CART1

3 Items



4. Press ENTER to continue. If the product is not currently stored in a bin, in the same packsize, the message No Home Bin for this Packsize is displayed. Press ENTER to skip this product and go to the next one. Otherwise, the first product is displayed, as well as the first sequential bin in which it is currently stored in the packsize on the cart, and you are prompted to verify the bin.

5. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the quantity to restock to that bin.

6. Put away the desired quantity, and at the Quantity prompt, enter the quantity you put away, and press ENTER. (You do not have to put away the total quantity on the cart at the same time.) If there are additional products on the cart, you are prompted to scan the bin for the next product.

RESTOCK TO BINLF408Tic Tac FreshmintBin:A3Scan the Bin >

RESTOCK TO BINLF408Tic Tac FreshmintPacksize:25Bin: A3Quantity: ( On Cart: 4 )

1 0 9


7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all remaining products on the cart. When you have put away all products, a message is displayed, indicating that the restock is complete.

8. To restock items from other cart locations, repeat steps 3 to 7.

9. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the main menu.

FINDING HOMES FOR PRODUCTS

When you are putting away or moving products into bins, you can do a bin query to search for the best bin location for your product, either by finding a current home for the product, or by finding an empty bin that can store the product. This directed putaway function is available when you are prompted to select a bin to which to move product, from the following functions:

• All receiving functions — for information, see “Putting Away Products” on page 48 and “Receiving without a Purchase Order” on page 45.

• Single-product Direct Move In — for information, see “Moving a Single Product In” on page 81.

• Fill Bins or one-step replenishment functions — for information, see “Selecting the Bins to Fill” on page 144.

Once you select a bin from the query function, you are returned immediately to the original function you were executing. The following procedure is applicable to all functions.

RESTOCK TO BIN

‘Cart’ Location>

Completed

PUT



> To find a home for a product:

1. From any of the functions listed above, press [F2]. A screen is displayed providing a summary of the availability of the product in different packsizes and zones.

Note: If all the inventory of the product in D-N-R bins has been allocated, the heading Rush to Pick Bins is displayed at the top of the screen.

2. To search for a home for the product, press the number corresponding to the packsize and zone in which you want to search for a bin, and press ENTER. Current homes for the product are displayed, as well as the on-hand quantity. An asterisk (*) indicates a dedicated, non-dedicated, or random pick bin.

3. Optionally, to print putaway labels for the product, press [F7]. You are returned to the original function. To return to the bin query function, repeat steps 1 and 2.

ROTATE TO OVERSTOCK Pack Zone DOH 30DAY1- 1 40 9502- 25 >30 0 3- 100 0 04- 0 0 05- 0 0 0Homes (1-5):

Number of days the product is expected to be available based on product velocity calculations.

Quantities required to fill sales orders for the next period indicated, according to velocity calculation parameters.

Available packsizes.

Zone(s) in which this packsize is available.

SIZ2:25/1 O/H1- C3 7*2- A4 4*

Enter - find emptySELECT BIN:

Packsize

Bin

Number of packs on hand

1 1 1



• To go to the previous screen and select another packsize or zone to view, press [F1].

• To exit this function without making a selection, press [F1] twice. You are returned to your original function.

• To select one of the product’s current homes, follow the procedure in “Selecting a Current Home” on page 112.

• To search for an empty bin to which to move the product, follow the procedure in “Finding an Empty Bin” on page 113.

SELECTING A CURRENT HOME

> To select a current home for a product:

1. From the list of bins displayed, press the number corresponding to the bin you want. If the product cannot be accepted in this bin (for example, if the packsize you are trying to move is not accepted in the destination bin), you are returned to the bin selection prompt. If the product can be accepted, this bin is immediately displayed as the selected bin for the function you were previously executing.

2. From the original function, when prompted to confirm the bin, do one of the following:

• To accept the selection, scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number at the prompt and press ENTER.

• To disregard your selection, use any of the methods available in the function to select a different bin, including doing another bin query by following this procedure from the beginning.

3. Continue by following the instructions for your respective function.



FINDING AN EMPTY BIN

You can find all empty bins in the system, and narrow your search to find only bins that meet specific criteria, such as bin range, size code, handle code, or reach code. (For an explanation of these, see “Bin/Bin Type” in Sage Accpac WMS.)

If bin capacities have been defined for products for any empty dedicated bins, the maximum quantity of the product that you can move to an empty bin will be displayed. For more information on setting bin capacities, see “Setting or Modifying a Product’s Bin Capacities” on page 354 of Chapter 12, “Warehouse And Product Maintenance”.

> To search for an empty bin:

1. From the list of bins displayed, press ENTER to search for any empty bins in the warehouse. If ABC, size, reach, or handle codes have been defined for the product, they are displayed. An asterisk (*) indicates a dedicated, non-dedicated, or random pick bin. If any empty bins are found, they are displayed.

SIZ2:25 ABC:A HDL:1 B: BULK12 G: A3 *

Zone

Bin

1 1 3


2. From the list of bins displayed, press the number corresponding to the bin you want. If you selected a dedicated bin, and a bin cap has been defined for it, the maximum number of products that can be stored in the bin is displayed (0 if no maximum has been defined). You are prompted to confirm the selection.


4. From the original function, when prompted to confirm the bin, do one of the following:

• To accept the selection, scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number at the prompt and press ENTER.

• To disregard your selection, use any of the methods available in the function to select a different bin, including doing another bin query by following this procedure from the beginning.

5. Continue by following the instructions for your respective function.

EMPTY LOCATION:LF408Pak: SIZ2:25/1 Bin: A3Cap: 0

F7 - Print LabelEnter - Accept

To print a putaway label for the product, press [F7]. You are returned to the original function. To return to the bin query function, repeat the steps from the beginning of the procedure.

To confirm the bin selection, press ENTER. If the product cannot be accepted in this bin (for example, if the bin is “sticky” and the product and/or packsize you are trying to move is not accepted in the destination bin), you are returned to the bin selection prompt. If the product can be accepted, this bin is immediately displayed as the selected bin for the function you were previously executing.



MOVING SERIALIZED PRODUCTS

If you want to quickly and easily move serialized products to a bin, you can scan a bin, and then repeatedly scan serial numbers. Each serial will be moved to that bin. This is quicker than a direct move, because you don’t need to scan or enter the bin from which you are moving the product. Because serial numbers should be unique, Sage Accpac WMS knows the bin that the product is currently in and you only have to scan the bin into which the product will be put.

> To move serialized products:


2. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Move Serial. The Move Serials screen is displayed and you are prompted to enter the bin into which you want to move the serial products.

ATT


Move SerialsBin:

1 1 5


3. At the Bin prompt, scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to move the products. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

You are prompted for a serial number.

4. At the Serial prompt, scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the serial number and press ENTER. A message indication that the move was successful is displayed.

5. Press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.

Move SerialsTo Bin: A01

Serial:

Move SerialsTo Bin: A01

Serial:

Serial Moved!



4 REPLENISHING PICK BINS

UNDERSTANDING REPLENISHMENT FUNCTIONS

Replenishment is the process of removing stock from overstock bins, breaking the stock into smaller packsizes, and moving them to pick bins or to work areas. Unlike Direct Move, replenishment is always performed in response to a replenishment request that has been issued by the system. The request may be generated by a sales or work order allocation, the Advance Replenishment function, or even manually entered from the handheld (for information on creating a replenishment request from the handheld, see “Creating Replenishment Requests” on page 119).

Note: Replenishment does not always have to be done from actual carton/overstock bins or larger packsizes. If inventory exists in pickable bins, and those bins were included when the replenishment requests were generated during allocation, you may be instructed to replenish from pick bins.

Once a replenishment request has been generated, there are a number of ways by which you can find out which stock should be replenished to which bins:

• By following letdown tickets. If your system is configured to print these automatically, they are printed whenever a replenishment request is issued.

• By following a Replenishment Report printed by your dispatcher.

• By using the Bin Lookup function. This function can help you to identify products that are marked HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT and need to be moved to pick bins. For procedures for looking up bins, see “Looking Up Bin Contents” on page 67.

1 1 7


• By warehouse policy. You may have a policy that establishes a routine for replenishing stock, without the need for printed letdown tickets.

Replenishment can be performed in a number of ways, which will depend on your configuration:

• In two steps

In this method, you first let down the stock from overstock (bulk) bins. The stock is moved to a temporary system location, REPLENIS, and a fill-bin request is issued. Then, you fill pick bins with the let down stock. You typically use this method when different equipment is required, overstock and pick bins are situated at a distance from each other, or you want to use the stock to fill multiple pick bins.Letting down stock is described in “Letting Down Stock” on page 123. Filling bins with let down stock is described in “Filling Bins” on page 141.

• In one step

If your configuration allows this, in this method, no fill-bin request is issued, but you move the stock immediately to a single final destination. Your warehouse will typically use this method when the equipment required to move the stock is the same, the overstock and pick bins are situated close to each other, or you only need to fill a single pick bin. In this method, you are immediately prompted to fill bins as soon as you have let down the stock. Letting down product for work orders is normally performed in one step.

• By Direct Move

If your system is configured to allow it, you can use the Direct Move function to process replenishment requests. For procedures for direct moving, see “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

1 1 8 C H A P T E R 4 R E P L E N I S H I N G P I C K B I N S


These replenishments functions are available through the Overstock menu.

> To access the Overstock menu:

From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Overstock. The Overstock menu is displayed:

Note: The options available in the Overstock menu will depend on your permissions.

CREATING REPLENISHMENT REQUESTS

You can create a replenishment request on-the-fly from the handheld with the Request Replenish function, for unallocated, unreserved product in overstock bins (that is, carton-type (C) bins only). If your system is configured to do so, letdown tickets will automatically be printed for the products required.

OVERSTOCK 1-Direct Move2-Letdown Stock3-Fill Bins4-Carton Route5-Move Serial

1 1 9


> To request replenishment:

1. From the main menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. The Warehouse Maintenance menu is displayed.

Note: The options available in the Warehouse Maintenance menu will depend on your permissions.

2. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Request Replenis.

If your system supports multiple companies/clients, and you are prompted for the client name, enter the client name/number and press ENTER.

You are prompted to enter the product you want to replenish.


WAREHOUSE MAINT 2/21:Request Replenis2:Product Maint

REQUEST REPLENProduct

3PL



3. Scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


If there is no stock of the product in carton bins the message None Available in Overstock is displayed. If there is stock of the product in carton bins, you are prompted to select the carton bin from which you would like to request replenishment. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed.


5. Enter the number corresponding to the bin from which you want to request replenishment. The number of packs actually available for replenishment is displayed.

LF408 1/1Select: 1: BULK3 10*252: 3:

LF408 1/1Location Date 1:BULK3 02072:BULK4 0407

REQUEST REPLENLF408PACKS OF 25010 AVAILABLEQTY TO REQUEST:

1 2 1


6. Optionally, to view the requests already in queue, press [F2].

7. The quantity for which there are existing replenishments requests for the product is displayed in the REQUEST IN QUEUE field (for two-step replenishment, this is the number of let-down requests). For two-step replenishment, the quantity of the product in REPLENIS system locations, and awaiting fill bins is displayed in REQUESTED IN LETDOWN field.

Press ENTER to return to the Qty to Request prompt.

8. Optionally, to view the quantity in transit (i.e., in a TRANSIT system location as a result of a 2-step direct move in the warehouse), press [F3].

9. The total quantity of the product that is in the process of being moved in the warehouse and is currently in a TRANSIT system location (in a 2-step direct move) is displayed in the IN TRANSIT field. For information about direct moves, see “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

Press ENTER to return to the Qty to Request prompt.

10. If there are not more than 0 available, press ENTER to return to the Product prompt to select another product; otherwise, at the Qty to Request prompt, enter the number of packs you would like to replenish to pick bins, and press ENTER. The replenishment request is generated, and you are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

LF408REQUEST IN QUEUE2500REQUESTED IB LETDOWN: 250:Press ENTER to continue...

LF408IN TRANSIT3000

Press ENTER to continue...



LETTING DOWN STOCK

Letting down stock with the Letdown Stock function is the first step to replenishing the stock in a pick bin (or the only step, if you are using one-step replenishment). Replenishment requests indicate which products need to be let down.

To initiate a letdown, you select a method of letting down stock; that is, you select the replenishment requests you want to process, based on one of five criteria:

• By group — This method takes you sequentially through overstock bins in your warehouse for which replenishment requests have been issued — starting from the first bin you specify — according to the replenishment group you want to process. This method is described in “Letting Down Stock by Group” on page 124.

• By quantity — This method displays a list of bins for which replenishment requests have been issued — sorted from the highest quantity required to the lowest quantity — and lets you select from the list. This method is often useful if you want to replenish large quantities first, or need to plan the type of equipment you will need to let down the stock. This method is described in “Letting Down Stock by Quantity” on page 128.

• By product — This method allows you to let down stock for all requests for a single product at a time. This is often useful if a certain product must be replenished immediately, or if you are using letdown tickets. This method is described in “Letting Down Stock by Product” on page 132.

• By pick zone — If your system uses multiple zones, this method takes you sequentially through overstock bins in your warehouse for which replenishment requests have been issued — starting from the first bin you specify — according to the zone which you want to replenish. This method is useful if you need to replenish particular zones in a certain sequence, or if you want to be able to organize the let down stock according to the zone to which it will be put away. This method is described in “Letting Down Stock by Zone” on page 135.

• By kit — This method is used for gathering the components needed to fill work or packaging orders. You can let down stock for multiple kit or packaging orders at a time. This method is described in “Letting Down Stock by Kit” on page 139.

ZONE

KIT

1 2 3


Once you have removed the appropriate stock from the bins, you are instructed on how to break it down into smaller packsizes.

Tip: In most situations, you should remove more product from the overstock bins than required for the specific replenishment request. This will reduce the future number of replenishment requests for the product. The Letdown Stock function displays the quantity expected to be required to fill sales orders for a certain number of days (this is specified in your configuration; by default it is 1 day). You can use this forecast quantity as a guide in deciding how much product you should replenish.

LETTING DOWN STOCK BY GROUP

When you let down stock by group, you select the first bin from which you want the system to search for a replenishment request.

If your dispatcher has assigned replenishment requests to groups during allocation, according to particular criteria, such as the customer for orders, the date required for orders, and so on, you can select the replenishment groups you want to fulfill. You may even be assigned to specific groups, or you may be required to select groups in a particular sequence.

Note: Whether your warehouse uses dispatcher-defined replenishment groups or not, any replenishment requests that have been generated by the Advance Replenishment function are automatically assigned to the group ADVANCE. Any replenishment requests for kit orders are automatically assigned to separate groups for each work order, identified by the work order number.

REPLEN

KIT



> To let down stock by group:

1. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Letdown Stock. The Letdown Stock menu is displayed.

2. Press 1 to select By Group. Each replenishment group appears in sequence, with the number of letdown requests for each group displayed to the right of the name of each replenishment group. The first item in the list always corresponds to all replenishment groups.

Note: You cannot let down stock destined for kit orders for different work areas at the same time. You must first complete the replenishment (including the fill-bin step that moves the product to the work area) for one work area before you can let down stock destined for another work area.

LETDOWN STOCK1- By Group2- By Quantity3- By PRODUCT4- By Pick Zone5- By Kit

1/1Select:1:ALL GROUPS 102: 63:July9alloc 24:june24 1

Number of letdown requests for this group.

1 2 5


3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of replenishment groups, and press the number corresponding to the group for which you want to let down stock. You are prompted to enter the overstock bin from which you want to begin your search for replenishment requests.

4. Scan the barcode label of the first bin in the warehouse from which you want to search for replenishment requests, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The system searches for all requests beginning with that bin, sequentially, through to the last overstock bin.

5. If there are no replenishment requests past that bin, enter another bin, until you are directed to the first bin with a replenishment request. The quantity and packsize required to process the replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.

LETDOWN STOCK1st Bulk Loc’n:

LETDOWN STOCK 1DAYLF408 1300Tic Tac Freshmint>BULK3 3*2500Qty Reqd: 1Packs Out:Break to Pack: 100Group:

Quantity and packsize currently in the bin.

Number of packs to remove to process this replenishment request.

Packsize required to fill pick bins for this replenishment request.

Quantity expected to be required for sales orders for the period indicated, according to forecasting parameters.



6. If you want to skip this product and go to the next request, press [F3]. Otherwise, remove the desired number of packs, and at the Packs Out prompt, enter the quantity of packs you removed, and press ENTER.

If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are letting down.

You are prompted to break down the quantity into the appropriate packsize.

7. Break down the product into the displayed packsize and press ENTER to continue. If there are additional replenishment requests for this bin or for any bins in the replenishment group(s) you selected, you are prompted to let down stock for the next request.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for all remaining replenishment requests. When you have let down stock for all bins in the group and range you selected, a message is displayed that there are no outstanding replenishment requests for this group/range.

9. Press ENTER to return to the group selection menu.

LETDOWN STOCKLF408 Tic Tac FreshmintGroup:

BREAK DOWN INTO25 PACKS OF 100

LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests pastBULK1

ATT

1 2 7


10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for other replenishment groups you want to replenish, or press [F1] to exit and return to the Replenishment menu. When you have filled all replenishment requests, a message is displayed.

11. Press [F1] to return to the Letdown Stock menu.

LETTING DOWN STOCK BY QUANTITY

> To let down stock by quantity:


LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forgroup.




2. Press 2 to select By Quantity. You are prompted to enter the overstock bin from which you want to begin your search for replenishment requests.

3. Scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The system searches for all requests beginning with that bin, sequentially, through to the last overstock bin.

Note: You cannot let down stock destined for kit or packaging orders for different work areas at the same time. You must first complete the replenishment (including the fill-bin step that moves the product to the work area) for one work area before you can let down stock destined for another work area.

4. If there are no replenishment requests past that bin, enter another bin. If there are multiple replenishment requests, a list of bins with replenishment requests is displayed, in order of the quantity of products, from highest to lowest, for all selected overstock bins.

LETDOWN STOCK1st Bulk Loc’n:

REPLENISH 1/1Select Location>1:BULK3 72:BULK3 53:BULK1 14:BULK1 1

KIT

1 2 9


5. To select a bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, press the number corresponding to the bin you want to select, and press ENTER. The quantity and packsize required to process the replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.


If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are letting down.


7. Break down the product into the displayed packsize and press ENTER to continue. If there are additional replenishment requests for this product, you are returned to the Select Item screen.



LETDOWN STOCK 1DAYLF408 1300Tic Tac Freshmint>BULK3 3*2500Qty Reqd: 1Packs Out:Break to Pack: 100





ATT



8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each remaining replenishment request. When you have let down stock for all remaining replenishment requests, a message is displayed that there are no outstanding replenishment requests past the bin you initially entered.

9. Press ENTER to return to the bulk location selection prompt.

10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for other bulk locations from which you want to let down stock, or press [F1] to exit and return to the Replenishment menu. When you have filled all replenishment requests, a message is displayed.


LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests past BULK1

LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forquantity.

1 3 1


LETTING DOWN STOCK BY PRODUCT

When you let down stock by product, you select the product you want to let down, and the system directs you to all bins with a replenishment request for that product.

> To let down stock by product:


2. Press 3 to select By Product. You are prompted to enter the number of the product you want to let down.


REPLENISHMENTPRODUCT>



3. Scan the product’s barcode label or enter the product number and press ENTER.


If there is more than one replenishment request for this product, a list of bins from which stock needs to be let down is displayed.

Note: You cannot let down stock destined for kit orders for different work areas at the same time. You must first complete the replenishment (including the fill-bin step that moves the product to the work area) for one work area before you can let down stock destined for another work area.

4. To select a bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, press the number corresponding to the bin you want to select, and press ENTER. You are directed to the bin, and the quantity and packsize required to process the replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.

REPLENISH 1/1Select Location>Tic Tac Freshmint1:BULK3 25002:BULK4 2500






1 3 3


5. Remove the desired number of packs, and at the Packs Out prompt, enter the quantity of packs you removed.

6. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are letting down.


7. Break down the product into the displayed packsize and press ENTER to continue. If there are additional replenishment requests for this product, the Select Location screen is re-displayed; otherwise you are returned to the product selection prompt.

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each remaining replenishment request for this product. When you have let down stock for all remaining replenishment requests for the product, a message is displayed that there are no outstanding replenishment requests for the product.

9. Press ENTER to return to the product selection prompt.



LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forProduct LF408

ATT



10. To replenish other products, repeat steps 3 to 9; otherwise, press [F1] to return to the Replenishment menu. When you have let down stock for all replenishment requests, a message is displayed.


LETTING DOWN STOCK BY ZONE

Letting down stock by zone selects replenishment requests based on the zone to which the stock is being replenished.

> To let down stock by pick zone:


LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forproduct.

ZONE


1 3 5


2. Press 4 to select By Pick Zone. Each pick zone with replenishment requests appears in sequence, with the number of letdown requests for each zone displayed to the right of the zone. The first item in the list always corresponds to all zones.

3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of zones, and press the number corresponding to the zone for which you want to let down stock. You are prompted to enter the overstock bin from which you want to begin your search for replenishment requests.

4. Scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The system searches for all requests beginning with that bin, sequentially, through to the last overstock bin.

1/1Select:1:ALL ZONES 32: ZONE D 23: ZONE G 1

REPLENISHMENT1st Bulk Loc’n:



5. If there are no replenishment requests past that bin, enter another bin, until you are directed to the first bin with a replenishment request. The quantity and packsize required to process the replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.


7. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are letting down.


8. Break down the product into the displayed packsize and press ENTER to continue. If there are additional replenishment requests for this bin or from any bins, for the pick zone(s) you selected, you are prompted to let down stock for the next request.








ATT

1 3 7


9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 for all remaining replenishment requests. When you have let down stock from all bins for the pick zone you selected, a message is displayed that there are no outstanding replenishment requests for those pick zones.

10. Press ENTER to return to the pick zone selection screen.

11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 for other pick zones you want to replenish, or press [F1] to exit and return to the Replenishment menu. When you have filled all replenishment requests, a message is displayed.


LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forGD

LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forpick zones.



LETTING DOWN STOCK BY KIT

Letting down stock by kit selects replenishment requests based on the work or packaging order for which the component products are required. You can let down the stock for several kit/packaging orders at a time. Note, however, that you cannot let down stock destined to different work areas at the same time. You must complete the replenishment for one work area before beginning to let down stock for another one. Depending on your configuration, you may also be required to verify the work area to which you are moving items for a packaging order.

Let-down by kit may be performed in one step or two steps. While most warehouses let down work and packaging orders in one step, your configuration may require a separate fill-bin step; if that is the case, see the procedure in “Filling Bins” on page 141. The following procedure illustrates the one-step method.

> To replenish by kit:

1. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Letdown Stock. The Replenishment menu is displayed.

2. Press 5 to select By Kit. You are prompted to enter the work order for which you are replenishing products.

KIT


LETDOWN STOCKWO#:

WorkOrders:0

1 3 9


3. Enter the work/packaging order number and press ENTER. The number of orders is increased by 1.

4. Repeat step 3 for each work/packaging order you want to let down.

5. When you are ready to begin letting down stock, press [F2]. You are directed to the first bin with a component replenishment request for the orders you selected.

6. If you want to skip this product and go to the next request, press [F3]. Otherwise, remove the desired number of packs, and at the Packs Out prompt, enter the quantity of packs you removed. The work area for this kit order is displayed, and you are prompted to break down the quantity into the appropriate packsize or unit required for this order.

7. Break down the product into the displayed packsize, move the components to the displayed work area, and press ENTER to continue. If there are additional replenishment requests for the work orders you selected, you are prompted to let down stock for the next request.

LETDOWN STOCK LF312 Doublemint GumKit: W-101Workarea: WORK1BREAK DOWN INTO100 PACKS OF 1

LETDOWN STOCK 14DAYLF312 0Doublemint Gum>B2 12*100Qty Reqd: 1PACKS OUT:BREAK TO PACK:1



Packsize required to fill pick bin for this replenishment request.



8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each remaining replenishment request until you have let down all components required for each order. When all components are let down, a message is displayed confirming the replenishment.

9. Press ENTER to return to the work order selection prompt.

10. To let down stock for additional work/packaging orders, repeat steps 3 to 9.

11. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Letdown Stock menu.

FILLING BINS

If your system is configured to require two-step replenishment, stock that has been let down through any of the Letdown Stock functions is kept in a temporary system location named REPLENIS (or REPLEN99, where 99 is your warehouse number). As long as the stock is in this location, it cannot be used to fulfill orders.

To make the stock available for allocating to orders, a fill-bin request is issued for each product that has been let down. You use the Fill Bins function to move stock from the REPLENIS location to a pick bin or bins.

LETDOWN STOCK

There are no outstanding replenishment requests forW01234.BTO.

1 4 1


The steps for filling bins are:

1. Identify the let down product with which you want to fill bins. Follow the procedures in “Selecting the Product to Move” on page 142.

2. Select a bin or bins to which you want to move the product (except for work areas). There are several ways of selecting bins to fill. All of these are described in “Selecting the Bins to Fill” on page 144.

SELECTING THE PRODUCT TO MOVE

> To select the product to move:

1. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Fill Bins. You are prompted to enter the number of the product with which you want to fill bins.

2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


If there are multiple fill-bin requests for this product, a list of them is displayed.

FILL BINS

PRODUCT>

LF408 1/1Select: 1:REPLENIS 25*1002:REPLENIS 100*25



3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens, and press the number corresponding to the quantity and packsize you want to move from the REPLENIS location, and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to remove for the first pick bin location.

4. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs which you want to move to the first bin (you do not need to move the entire quantity to one bin), and press ENTER. If the product is required for a work area, you are prompted to move the product to the appropriate work area. Otherwise, if the product is stored in any bins currently, or if the product is associated with a sticky bin, the first sequential bin in the system is displayed, as well as the number of packs required.

5. To continue, follow any of the methods described in “Selecting the Bins to Fill” on page 144.


Packsize: 100# Packs: 25To Remove:


Cartons:50Loc’n:A3Verify:

1 4 3


SELECTING THE BINS TO FILL

Once you have specified the product you are moving from the REPLENIS location, you have several options for choosing the bin to which you want to move the products. You can use any of the following methods:

• If you know a valid bin to which you want to move the product, you can simply specify it. For this option, follow the procedure in “Specifying a Bin” on page 144.

• If the product is currently stored in a bin or bins, or your warehouse uses sticky homes, you can simply move it to the first bin in which the system finds it (in sequential order). For this option, follow the procedure in “Selecting the First Sequential Bin” on page 146.

• If the product is currently stored in a bin or bins, or your warehouse uses sticky homes, and you want to move it to one of the current or former homes, you can select the bin from a list. For this option, follow the procedure in “Selecting a Bin from a List” on page 147.

• If you want to do a bin query to find the most suitable bin to which to move the product, follow the procedure in “Selecting a Bin by Bin Query” on page 149.

SPECIFYING A BIN

If you know the bin to which you want to move the product, you can use this method to select a bin to fill, regardless of whether the product is currently stored in that bin or not.

Note: Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type. For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in another pick bin.

PUT



> To move product to a specific bin:

1. Specify the product you want to move, as described in “Selecting the Product to Move” on page 142.

2. Go to the bin you actually want, and at the Verify prompt, scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, an error message is displayed. Press ENTER to return to the previous screen, and enter a new bin.


When your bin selection is successful, you are directed to move the product to the bin.

4. Fill the bin with the selected quantity, and press ENTER. You are returned to the product selection prompt.

5. If there are remaining quantities of this product, repeat the entire process, starting from “Selecting the Product to Move” on page 142, for as much product as you need to move by this method. When you have filled all replenishment requests for this product, the message No Replenishment is displayed under the product selection prompt.

6. Press ENTER to return to the Overstock menu.


Packsize:25#Packs:4MOVE TO C1

ATT

1 4 5


SELECTING THE FIRST SEQUENTIAL BIN

You can only use this method to select a bin to fill if the product is currently stored in a pick bin, or if you are using sticky homes.

> To move product to the first sequential bin:


2. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs which you want to move to the first bin (you do not need to move the entire quantity to one bin), and press ENTER. To accept this bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are prompted to move the product to the displayed bin.


4. If there are remaining quantities of the product, repeat the entire process, starting from “Selecting the Product to Move” on page 142, for as much product as you need to move by this method. When you have filled all replenishment requests for this product, the message No Replenishment is displayed under the product selection prompt.



Packsize:100#Packs:50MOVE TO A3



SELECTING A BIN FROM A LIST

You can only use this method to select a bin to fill if the product is currently stored in a pick bin or if your warehouse uses sticky homes.

Note that this method displays all bins where the product is currently stored, including bins with restrictions on them that may not allow you to move the product to that bin (for packsize reasons, for example).

> To move product to a bin selected from a list:


2. At the To Remove prompt, press [F2]. A list of bins where the product is currently stored, or which are sticky homes for the product, is displayed. Optionally, to view additional screens of bins, press ENTER.

3. Optionally, to view the received or expiry dates (if applicable) of all inventory in each bin, press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins/dates, if necessary.

LF408 1/1Select: 1:A3 6*252:C2 8*253:B3 5*1004:C1 2*100

LF408 1/1Location Date 1:A3 02072:C2 0207 3:B3 0207 4:C1 0207

1 4 7


4. To select a bin, scan the bin’s barcode label, or press the number corresponding to the bin you want (this should be a pick bin) and press ENTER. The selected bin is displayed and you are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin.

5. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs which you want to move to this bin (you do not need to move the entire quantity to a single bin), and press ENTER. You are prompted to verify the bin.

6. Go to the bin, and scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER.


8. You are instructed to move the product to the bin.


Loc’n:B3Packsize: 100#Packs: 17To Remove:


Cartons:4Loc’n:B3Verify:


Packsize:100#Packs:4MOVE TO B3

ATT






SELECTING A BIN BY BIN QUERY

If your warehouse uses the directed putaway feature, you can find a bin to fill by doing a bin query.

> To select a bin by searching for an appropriate bin:


2. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs which you want to move to the first location (you do not need to move the entire quantity to one bin), and press ENTER. The first sequential pick bin in which this product may be stored is displayed.

3. Press [F2], and continue by following any of the procedures in “Finding Homes for Products” on page 110.

4. When you are returned to the Verify prompt, go to the bin you have selected, and scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER.

PUT

PRODUCT> LF522Big Red

Cartons: 25Loc’n: B4Verify:

1 4 9



You are instructed to move the product to the bin.




PRODUCT> LF522Big Red

Packsize: 100# Packs: 25MOVE TO B4

ATT



5 KITTING AND PACKAGING

ABOUT THE KITTING AND PACKAGING FUNCTIONS

Handheld kitting functions are used to process both kit orders and packaging orders. Kitting is the process of assembling multiple products and packaging them into a single finished product. Kitting is always performed in response to a work order being issued and allocated, either for immediate shipment (in the case of a build-to-order order), or for inventory maintenance (in the case of a build-to-stock order). There is also a function that lets you create build-to-stock work orders on the handheld, as described in “Entering Work Orders” on page 167.

When kit orders are allocated, assembly labels are automatically printed, which show the work area where the kits are to be built, the products, and quantities required to fill the work order.

Packaging is the process of splitting and/or repackaging a single product into different packsizes. Packaging is always performed in response to a packaging order being issued and allocated. In some cases, the assembly labels for the packaging items are automatically printed when a packaging order is allocated.

Sometimes it may be necessary to disassemble kits that were build in the warehouse using the kitting function. This may happen if too many kits were built or if final products were returned and you would rather keep components in stock, rather than assembled kits. Kits are disassembled using the Reverse Kitting function as described in “Disassembling Kits” on page 169.

KIT

PACK

1 5 1


UNDERSTANDING THE KITTING PROCESS

Once the components required to build kits or products to be repackaged have been moved to a work area through the replenishment process (for more information, see “Letting Down Stock by Kit” on page 139) or Direct Move, you can begin to build the kits or repackage the items, without the need for the handheld. Once you have completed some or all of the kits/packaging items, you use one, or both, of the following functions to record the number of kits built or items repackaged:

• Pull Kitting

This function allows you to enter a partial quantity of kits built or items repackaged. Provided that the order is not a build-to-order kit order, you can keep the order open while you continue to build additional kits or packaging items. Use this function if the kit-building or packaging process will continue for several days, and you want to make the finished kits or repackaged items available to inventory while you finish building the remaining quantities required for the order. When you have finished assembling all the kits or repackaged items, you can use this function or the Finish Kits function (described below) to record the final quantity built and close the order. The Pull Kitting function is described in “Pulling Kits/Packaging Items” on page 154.

• Finish Kits

This function records the quantity of kits built or items packaged, and closes the order. Use this function when you have finished building all the kits/packaging items, or have built/packaged a partial quantity but know that no more will be built. The Finish Kits function is described in “Finishing Kits/Packaging Items” on page 160.

When you are working with build-to-order kits, you cannot leave an order open once you have recorded any built kits. Instead, you must complete the order (even if you have not built the full quantity of kits) and immediately pick the finished goods into shipping cartons, as described in “Picking Build-to-Order Kits into Shipping Cartons” on page 166. Thus, you can use either the Pull Kitting or Finish Kits functions interchangeably.

1 5 2 C H A P T E R 5 K I T T I N G A N D P A C K A G I N G


Once you have built build-to-stock kits or packaging items, they will immediately be placed in a temporary system location (by default, this location is TRANS_FK). You will need to use the Direct Move function, described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69, to move the newly-built items into storage bins.

When you have closed out a work order, if any components are remaining in the work area, a message may be displayed. If you want to return the leftover components to storage bins, you can use the Direct Move function to do so. In some configurations, however, any remaining component items are automatically adjusted out.

ACCESSING THE KITTING/PACKAGING FUNCTIONS

All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Work Orders menu.

> To access the Work Orders menu:

From the main menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Work Orders. The Work Orders menu is displayed:.

Note: The options available in the Work Orders menu will depend on your permissions.

WORK ORDERS 1/1-Write Orders2-Pull Kitting3-Finish Kit4-Reverse Kitting

1 5 3


PULLING KITS/PACKAGING ITEMS

You can use the Pull Kits function to record partial or complete quantities of kits/packages required for an order, and either leave the order open (provided that the order is not build-to-order), or close it right away. Both options are described in the following procedure.

If your configuration allows it, you can also use this function to report extra kits that were not originally ordered. Additionally, if allowed by your configuration, you can report quantities of kits which the system believes that there are not enough components to build. In the following procedure, these options are not described.

> To pull kits or repackaged items:

1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Pull Kitting. You are prompted to enter the work order number for which you built the kits/packaging items.

PULL KITSWorkOrder #:




If any quantities of built kits or repackaged items were recorded previously, they are displayed, and you are prompted to enter the number of kits/repackaged items built since then.

Enter the order number and press ENTER. Press [F2] to display a list of work/packaging orders that are ready to be built.

Optionally, press ENTER to view additional screens of orders, and press the number corresponding to the order for which you have built kits/packaging items.

PULL KIT 1/1WO#:1:W-1002:W-1033:W-1014:W-1025:PACK0002

Number of kits/packaging items built so far.

Total number of kits/packaging items required for this order.

PULL KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-100Kit: LF1000Built: 0 of 400Qty:Pack of 1Unit(s)/Assembly

1 5 5


3. At the Qty prompt, enter the number of kits or packaging items that have been built and press ENTER.

If the finished goods or repackaged items that you have built require a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, you are prompted to enter it. Enter the attribute number for this batch of kits/packaging items, and press ENTER.

If the kit/packaging item contains items with non-unique attributes, such as lot numbers, and there are items with more than one attribute number, you are prompted to identify the lot number of the items you have pulled. Press the number corresponding to the lot number you want to select and press ENTER, or scan the barcode label of one unit of the product.

You are prompted to enter the quantity of the product with this attribute number that you used.

Press ENTER to accept the full quantity, or enter the actual quantity you pulled and press ENTER. If necessary, repeat this step for each different attribute number you have used.

ATT

ATT

Product with non-unique attributes.

The attribute number you selected. (If there is only a single attribute number in this work area, that number will appear by default.)

PULL KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-100Kit: LF408LF408/3837Bin:200 Pld: 0Need:50 (/1)Qty (50):

The number of packs of the product with this attribute number in the work area.

The number of packs of the product with this attribute number that have been pulled so far.

The total number of packs (and packsize) of the product that are needed to pull the quantity of kits you entered in step 3.



You are prompted to select labels to print for the built kits.


PRODUCT LABELKit: LF1000# of Labels:

F7 - Product Labels

To print simple product labels, enter the desired number of labels and press ENTER.

To specify additional information for the product labels, such as the customer SKU and packsize, press [F7].

At the SKU# prompt, enter the customer’s product number, or press ENTER to leave it blank. If you are prompted to enter a packsize and/or a number of packs (for packaged/bagged goods), enter the desired values at the prompts and press ENTER each time. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want to print and press ENTER.

PRODUCT LBLSProduct:? >LF1000Combo PackSKU #:

1 5 7


If you entered a partial quantity of kits required for the order, the number built is displayed, and a message is displayed that components are remaining in the work area.

Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.

If this is a build-to-order kit, you are prompted to print carton labels.

Continue by following the procedure in “Picking Build-to-Order Kits into Shipping Cartons” on page 166.

If you entered a quantity that totals the full quantity ordered, you are prompted to finish the kits now, and close the order.

PULL KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-100Kit: LF1000Built: 200.00 of 400.00Some components left in WORK1

PULL KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-100.001Kit: LF1000 BUILD-TO

# of labelsto print:Default = 1

PULL KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-100Kit: LF1000Kit is completedDo Finish Kit?



5. If this is not a build-to-order kit and you want to leave the order open, press N and you are returned to the Work Orders menu. (Note that if you choose this option, you will not be able to use the Pull Kitting function to close the order, but must use the Finish Kits function to do so.) Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.

Otherwise, press Y.

If any additional items are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to fill the order were let down originally), a message is displayed.



6. Otherwise, press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.

PULL KITSW-10OKit: LF1000SOME ITEMS LEFT IN:WORK1



1 5 9


FINISHING KITS/PACKAGING ITEMS

You use the Finish Kits function to record partial or complete quantities of kits or packaged items required for an order, and close it right away. If you expect to build additional kits or packaged items for the order, do not use this function until all kits/packaged items are complete; instead, use the Pull Kitting function to record the quantities built and leave the order open.

> To finish kits/packaging items:

1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Finish Kits. You are prompted to enter the order number for which you built the kits/packaged items.

2. Enter the order number and press ENTER. If this is not a build-to-order order, and you previously entered a full quantity with the Pull Kitting function, and any additional items are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to fill the order were let down originally), a message is displayed. (Otherwise, the message Kit is Completed is displayed.)

FINISH KITSWorkOrder #:

FINISH KITSW-103Kit: LF1000SOME ITEMS LEFT IN WORK1



If your configuration allows it, you may be prompted to clear out/delete any remaining items in the work area. When prompted, press Y to adjust out all items in the work area, or N to leave the items in the work area.

Press ENTER. The original quantity ordered and the final quantity built are displayed.

Press ENTER. The order is closed and you are returned to the Work Orders menu.

Otherwise, the number of kits/packaging items that were previously reported is displayed. (If this is a build-to-order order, or if you did not use the Pull Kitting function previously, 0 is displayed.) You are prompted to pull additional kits since the last quantity reported.

FINISH KITSBIN:WORK1WO#:W-103Kit:LF1000Qty :500Built: 50Enter - Finish

FINISH KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-103Kit: LF1000Built: 50 of 500450 to PullDo a Final Pullright now (Y/N)?

1 6 1



4. If you are reporting a quantity of kits built, at the Qty prompt, enter the quantity built and press ENTER.

If the finished goods that you have built require a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, you are prompted to enter it. Enter the attribute number for this batch of kits/packaged items, and press ENTER.

If this is the first time you are reporting kits or packaging items built for this order, or if additional kits/packaged items were built since the last time the Pull Kitting function was run, press Y. You are prompted to enter the quantity of kits/packaged items built.

Continue by following step 4.

If you do not want to report any kits built, or additional kits/packaged items since the last time the Pull Kitting function was run, press N. If any additional items are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to fill the order were let down originally), a message is displayed.

Press ENTER to continue. The original quantity ordered, and the final quantity built, are displayed.

Press ENTER. The order is closed and you are returned to the Work Orders menu.

FINISH KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-103Kit: LF1000Built: 50 of 500Qty:

FINISH KITSW-103Kit: LF1000SOME ITEMS LEFT IN WORK1

FINISH KITSBIN:WORK1WO#:W-103Kit:LF1000Qty :500Built: 50Enter - Finish

ATT



If the kit/packaging item contains items with non-unique attributes, such as lot numbers, and there are items with more than one attribute number, you are prompted to identify the lot number of the items you have pulled. Press the number corresponding to the lot number you want to select and press ENTER, or scan the barcode label of one unit of the product.

You are prompted to enter the quantity of the product with this attribute number that you used.

Enter the quantity, or press ENTER to accept the full quantity, and press ENTER. If necessary, repeat this step for each different attribute number you have used.

5. You are prompted to select labels to print for the built kits/packaged items.

PRODUCT LABELKit: LF1000# of Labels:

F7 - Product Labels

ATT

Product with non-unique attributes.

The attribute number you selected. (If there is only a single attribute number in this work area, that number will appear by default.)

PULL KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-100Kit: LF408LF408/3837Bin:200 Pld: 0Need:50 (/1)Qty (50):

The number of packs of the product with this attribute number in the work area.

The number of packs of the product with this attribute number that have been pulled so far.

The total number of packs (and packsize) of the product that are needed to pull the quantity of kits you entered in step 3.

1 6 3



The original quantity ordered, and the final quantity built, are displayed.

To print simple product labels, enter the desired number of labels and press ENTER.

To specify additional information for the product labels, such as the customer SKU and packsize, press [F7].

At the SKU# prompt, enter the customer’s product number, or press ENTER to leave it blank. If you are prompted to enter a packsize and/or a number of packs (for packaged or bagged goods), enter the desired values at the prompts and press ENTER each time. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want to print and press ENTER.

PRODUCT LBLSProduct:? >LF1000Combo PackSKU #:

FINISH KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-103Kit#:LF1000Built: 50.00 of 500.00



7. Press ENTER. If your final quantity is less than the number of kits/packaged items ordered, a message is displayed that components are remaining in the work area.



Otherwise, a message is displayed confirming that the kits are complete, and the order is closed.

8. Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.



FINISH KITSBIN: WORK1WO#: W-103Kit#:LF1000Kit is completed

1 6 5


PICKING BUILD-TO-ORDER KITS INTO SHIPPING CARTONS

When you report build-to-order kits through the Pull Kitting or Finish kits functions, you are immediately prompted to pick the finished goods into shipping cartons. You will need to know how many shipping cartons you will require to pack the finished goods.

> To pick finished goods into shipping cartons:

1. At the # of Labels to Print prompt, do one of the following:

• If you only require a single shipping carton, press ENTER to print a single picking/shipping label. Pack all the finished goods into the same carton, and collect your label from the printer. Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.

• If you require more than one shipping carton, enter the number of cartons, and press ENTER. You are prompted to scan the carton label of the first carton.

2. Scan or enter the carton number of the first picking/shipping label, and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the quantity of finished goods you will pack into this carton.

Carton:

Scan Carton

Carton:100000014Qty:

Packs of 1



3. Count the number of packs you are packing into this carton, enter the quantity, and press ENTER.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each carton label you printed. When you are done, if any additional items are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to fill the order were let down originally), a message is displayed.

5. Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.

ENTERING WORK ORDERS

If you have the appropriate permissions, you can use the Build Kits function to create a build-to-stock work order for a kit that is defined in your database.

> To create a work order:

1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Write Orders. You are prompted to enter a work order number for this work order.

PULL KITSW-10OKit: LF1000SOME ITEMS LEFT IN:WORK1

BUILD-TO-STOCK

Workorder #

1 6 7


2. Enter a number for this work order, and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the kit number for this work order.

3. At the Kit prompt, enter the product number for the kit and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the work area where the kits are to be built and temporarily stored.

4. At the Stage prompt, enter the work area location where the kits will be built and press ENTER. If you enter a work area that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the work area, press Y to add the work area or N not to add the work area. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new work area.

The number of available (unallocated) component units is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the number of kits you want to build.

BUILD-TO-STOCKW-101

Kit:

BUILD-TO-STOCKW-101

LF1000Stage:Pack of 1 Unit(s)/Assembly

BUILD-TO-STOCKW-101

LF1000Stage:WORK1Avail: 7800Build?* APPROX!!*



5. At the Build? prompt, enter the number of kits to be built for this work order, and press ENTER. The order is created, and can now be allocated.

Press ENTER. You are returned to the Work Order prompt screen, where you can create another work order or press [F1] to return to the Work Orders menu.

DISASSEMBLING KITS

The Reverse Kitting function is used to disassemble final products built from kits in the warehouse. Reverse kitting is useful if, for example, too many kits were built or if final products were returned, and you would rather keep components in stock, instead of assembled kits.

The warehouse staff disassembles the kit into its component items and quantities, according to the products and quantities that were used to fill the work order when it was built. The Reverse Kitting function can only be used to disassemble all of the kits that were built on the work order—you cannot disassemble less than the number of kits that were built. For example, if five kits were built for a work order, all five kits will be disassembled by reverse kitting; it is not possible to reverse only three kits from the order.

Components attributes (serial numbers and lots), if applicable, are captured when the kit(s) are disassembled.

When disassembling a final product, all the components are put into a single destination work area (bin). The warehouse staff can use the direct move function later, if necessary to find different bins for all or some of the components.

BUILD-TO-STOCKW-101To Build: 100of KitLF1000Workshp:WORK1

Created

ATT

1 6 9


> To disassemble kits:

1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Reverse Kitting. You are prompted to enter the number of the work order that you want to disassemble.

2. At the Enter Work Order prompt, enter the work order that was originally used to build the kit that you want to disassemble. The kit associated with the work order is displayed for verification.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the that this is the kit you want to disassemble. You are prompted to enter the work area where the kit to be disassembled is located.

REVERSE KIT

Enter Work Order:

Order:W-101

Kit:LF1000

Enter - Continue

REVERSE KIT

LF1000Enter Work Order:




5. A message displays that the kit has been disassembled. The components are put in the same work area in which the kit is dissambled.To move the components to other bins in the warehouse, see “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

6. Press ENTER. You are returned to the Enter Work Order prompt on the Reverse Kit screen, where you can disassemble another kit, or press [F1] to return to the Work Orders menu.

Enter the bin and press ENTER. Press [F2] to display a list of bins containing the kit.

Optionally, press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, and press the number corresponding to the bin from which you want to select the kit to be disassembled.

PULL KIT 1/1WO#:1:W-1002:W-1033:W-1014:W-1025:PACK0002

1 7 1


6 PICKING AND PACKING ORDERS

ABOUT PICKING AND PACKING SALES ORDERS

Picking is the act of removing products from bins. Packing is the act of putting these products into cartons or totes for shipping. Depending on the picking styles used in the warehouse, picking and packing are often done simultaneously. The various picking and packing processes available are documented in this chapter starting with “Understanding Picking and Packing” on page 174.

If your warehouse uses license plates, license plates can be part of the picking process. After reading this chapter, refer to “Picking an Order Using License Plates” on page 386.

Occasionally, you may need to remove items from an order that is completely picked and ready to be shipped. The Unpick function lets you take items out of an order and return those items to stock. Described in “Unpicking an Order” on page 209.

Another special circumstance that may arise involves the need to create orders on-the-fly for front-counter orders, or emergency orders which you do not want to process through the normal Sage Accpac WMS system. The Sales Order by Walking function lets you create and process sales orders completely on the handheld. Described in “Entering Sales Orders” on page 211.

UNDERSTANDING PICKING AND PACKING

Picking is the act of removing products from bins. Packing is the act of putting these products into cartons or totes for shipping. In Sage Accpac WMS’s most common picking style, these two processes are combined.

1 7 3


In a Sage Accpac WMS warehouse, you rarely pick one order at a time; instead, you pick orders in waves, or groups of orders. The system finds the most efficient way for you to collect all the products you need for all the orders in the wave, so you walk through the warehouse only once, and never need to return to the same bin twice.

Although there are many different picking styles used in a Sage Accpac WMS warehouse (these are described in “Understanding Picking Styles” on page 175), the picking process essentially consists of the following steps:

1. If your warehouse uses multiple zones, select a zone or zones in which you will pick orders. This procedure is described in “Selecting a Picking Zone” on page 181.

2. Identify a wave of sales orders which you want to pick. There are various methods by which you can create, start or restart a wave of sales orders; all are described in “Starting a Wave of Sales Orders” on page 180.

3. Select a picking mode, go to the bin to which the system directs you (if the selected mode does so), and pick the product required for the orders in your wave. Selecting a picking mode and picking products are described in “Picking Orders” on page 191.

4. Repeat the process until your wave is complete.

The actual steps you follow in picking may vary from warehouse to warehouse, depending on your configuration, and you may be prompted to enter or validate other information, pertaining to shipping cartons, cubage, quantity of product, and so on.

Furthermore, your warehouse will have a policy for dealing with over-picking or short-picking, and your system will be configured accordingly. In the procedures given in this chapter, overpicking is not allowed, and the only additional options that are described are skipping and shorting picks (see “Handling Picks You Cannot Fulfill” on page 206).

UNDERSTANDING PICKING STYLES

When a wave of sales orders is created, Sage Accpac WMS generates a picking path, or route, through the warehouse. By default, the pick path follows the sequence of bins from lowest zone to highest zone (if multiple zones are used in your system and are included in the wave), and from lowest bin number to highest number. In this way, you only need to visit a single bin

ZONE

1 7 4 C H A P T E R 6 P I C K I N G A N D P A C K I N G O R D E R S


once and collect as much product as is required from each bin to fulfill all the orders in the wave.

In the most common method of picking, known as regular/wave picking, you are directed to each bin in sequence, and told the product, packsize and quantity to pick. You pick the required product, and scan its barcode label. You are then told the carton number into which to pack the product. You place the items into this carton, and scan the picking/shipping label for that carton. Finally, you enter the quantity of product you picked. You are then directed to the next pick, and the process is repeated, until you have picked and packed all orders in your wave.

Although Sage Accpac WMS supports many other styles of picking, all are variations of this basic process, and only really differ from the default wave picking style, in the following parameters:

• The number of steps, and the sequence in which they are performed.

• The sequence of picks in the wave (forward or reverse).

• The number of different people who are involved in picking a single order.

• The number of different zones in which different pickers may work.

The following matrix lists some of the most popular picking styles, and distinguishes between each one in terms of these different parameters. Note also that virtually all of these basic styles can be combined with each other to create additional styles. Following the matrix table, a brief description is given of each style, the contexts in which it is typically used, and how it is performed.

ZONE

1 7 5


Note: In all picking styles, more than one picker cannot pick the same product from the same bin at the same time. This also applies to product picking (see below), in which all products are in the BATCHPCK location.

Style Different step sequence

Different bin sequence

Multiple pickers on the same order

Multiple pickers on the same order at the same time

Pickers must work in particular zones

Pickers can wave orders

Requires restart of wave

Batch picking

yes no yes yes no yes no

Product picking

yes yes yes yes no yes no

Scanner picking

yes yes yes yes no yes no

Reverse picking

no yes yes or no yes no yes no

Pick-and-pass picking

no no yes no no yes yes

Sequen-tial zone picking

no no yes no yes yes yes

Simulta-neous zone picking

no no yes yes yes no no

ZONE

ZONE



BATCH PICKING

This method allows you to collect all the products required in a wave before packing them into cartons. For each pick, you are guided to the pick bin, and told the product and quantity to pick, but not the cartons into which to pack the items. Instead, you place the products onto a cart or into totes, and bring them to a sorting area, where you then pack them into cartons for the appropriate orders.

This method of picking is particularly well suited to a warehouse layout that is not conducive to bringing cartons through aisles of pick bins. It is also an efficient way to pick a large number of orders (each with a few lines), as it lets you split the picking and packing functions between two people.

To pick by batch, after starting a wave, you simply select the Batch Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For details, see “Picking Orders by Batch” on page 196. Once you have picked the items, you or another picker have the option of packing the items by product (see “Product Picking” below), by order (see “Reverse Picking” on page 179), or in the same sequence in which the products were pulled off the shelves.

PRODUCT PICKING

This method is typically (although not required to be) used in conjunction with batch picking, as it allows you to select the products you want to pick, usually from a previously-picked collection of items, and pack them in the sequence that you choose, rather than in the sequence of bins. In this method, you identify the product to pack, and the system prompts you with the quantities and cartons required for each order in the wave.

Again, this method is typically used in warehouses where it is not feasible to bring cartons through aisles, or in which it is more efficient to split up picking and packing functions between two or more people. It can also used to allow experienced pickers to pack orders correctly the first time (for example, by packing the largest items at the bottom of the cartons, etc.) without having to re-pack them later.

To pick by product, you typically restart a wave that has already been batch picked (for information, see “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188), and then simply select the Product Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For details, see “Picking Orders by Product” on page 199.

1 7 7


SCANNER PICKING

This method, also referred to as supermarket picking, is similar to product picking, but requires that you scan each product unit before packing it and picking the next product.

This method is typically (although not required to be) used in conjunction with batch picking, as it allows you to select the products you want to pick, usually from a previously-picked collection of items, and scan each product/packsize (quantity of one unit per scan) as you put them in the carton. This is similar to a supermarket check-out line, where each individual product in the order is scanned separately.

To scanner pick, you might typically use a procedure whereby you restart a wave that has already been batch picked (for information, see “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188). Then, select the Scanner Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For details, see “Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit” on page 202.

PICK-AND-PASS PICKING

Pick-and-pass picking allows orders to be split up between several pickers, and can be useful in large-volume orders that require multiple cartons. In this method, one picker picks all the products in a wave in one area of the warehouse, such as an aisle, and hands off the rest of the wave to the next picker in another area of the warehouse. This method can be used to divide aisles of bins up so that individual pickers only work in a specified number of aisles. They can pick each aisle sequentially, or if they want to pick simultaneously, can start at opposite ends of an area and meet in the middle (see “Reverse Picking” on page 179). Typically, to pick multiple aisles simultaneously, the aisles are split up into different zones (see “Zone Picking” on page 179).

To pick-and-pass, you restart a wave that has already been started by the first picker (for information, see “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188), skip the picks that are not in your area if you are picking multiple aisles simultaneously (for information, see “Skipping a Pick” on page 207), and pick your areas, until all the products in all the orders are picked. You can use any number of picking modes, such as regular, batch, or product picking in a pick-and-pass process.

ZONE



ZONE PICKING

There are two basic styles of zone picking supported by Sage Accpac WMS:

• Sequential zone picking — In this method, one picker picks part of an order in one zone at one time and passes the partially filled cartons from zone to zone, as in pick-and-pass described above.

• Simultaneous zone picking — In this method, pickers in multiple zones work on the same order at the same time. The cartons are then consolidated and re-packed when all zones have been completed. Simultaneous zone picking can prevent the problem of slowdowns in picking because of hold-ups in a particular zone or in the packing area.

To zone pick, you specify only the zones in which you will pick orders, as described in “Selecting a Picking Zone” on page 181. If you are sequential zone picking, you typically restart a wave that has already been picked in another zone (for information, see “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188). For all zone picking techniques, you can use any mode, such as regular, or batch picking.

REVERSE PICKING

Picking in reverse is also not really a style of picking, but a variation in the sequencing of the wave. That is, rather than proceeding in zone and bin sequence from lowest to highest zone, and lowest to highest bin, the system guides you to picks from highest zone to lowest zone, and highest bin to lowest bin. This mode is typically used to have two pickers simultaneously pick a single wave: one picker uses forward picking to start at the lowest zone and bin, while the other picker uses reverse picking to start at the highest zone and bin. The two meet in the middle when they are finished.

To pick in reverse, you typically restart a wave that has been started by a forward picker (for information, see “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188), and then simply select the Reverse Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For details, see “Understanding and Selecting Picking Modes” on page 192. Again, you can combine this mode with any other technique, including regular wave picking, and batch picking.

ZONE

1 7 9


OTHER PICKING STYLES

Additional picking styles that may be used in your warehouse include:

• Shortcut picking — This method allows you to skip entering a quantity picked for a product, but immediately scan the product for the next pick instead. This type of picking is usually only permitted for expert pickers, who are assigned a special type of user ID. As this picking style requires special configuration, it is not documented in this manual.

• One-scan picking — This method allows you to pick items directly into a single carton or multiple cartons and simply scan a single carton, without scanning or entering any other information. This is an ‘extreme’ picking style that is only used in rare situations, such as rush periods where picking speed is more important than accuracy. One-scan picking is described in “Picking Orders in One Scan” on page 205.

• Full-case picking — This method allows you to pick a full case of products without a handheld, and have the carton scanned in the shipping area with the Carton Shipping function (see “Processing Shipping Cartons” on page 240). To full-case pick, your system must be configured to allocate products from bins in which bulk quantities are stored, and to print one pick ticket for each unit to pick.

STARTING A WAVE OF SALES ORDERS

To begin picking orders, you must first identify the wave you want to pick. Even if you are picking a single order, it still must be part of a wave before you can pick it. To start a wave, you use the following steps:

Select the zone in which you want to pick orders. For instructions, see “Selecting a Picking Zone” on page 181.



Start a wave by using one of the following methods:

• If orders have already been waved out by a dispatcher, and your system is configured to allow you to restart waves automatically, you can scan the picking/shipping labels for the orders that have been assigned to you, or enter the wave number. To use either of these methods, follow the instructions in “Starting a Dispatcher- or System-Waved Wave” on page 183.

• If orders have already been waved out by a dispatcher, and your system is configured to force you to manually restart waves, you need to restart the wave. Follow the instructions in “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188.

• If orders have not been waved out by a dispatcher, and your system is configured to allow picker waving, you can create the wave from orders that are ready to wave. To use this method, follow the instructions in “Creating a Wave from the Handheld” on page 185.

Your system may be configured to limit your waves to a single order; in the following procedures, multiple-order waves are described.

SELECTING A PICKING ZONE

If your warehouse uses multiple zones, you may be prompted to select the zone in which you want to pick.

> To select the picking zone:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick & Pack. From the Picking Menu, press 1 to select Picking. You are prompted to enter the zone(s) from which you want to pick.

ZONE

PICKZone:

F9 for all zones

1 8 1



The Wave Information screen is displayed, with all totals at 0 to begin.

3. To continue, use one of the following procedures:

• To start a wave that has already been waved out by the dispatcher, or by the system, see “Starting a Dispatcher- or System-Waved Wave” on page 183.

• To restart a wave that has already been waved or partially picked, see “Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave” on page 188.

• To create a new wave from the handheld (if your system is configured for picker waving), see “Creating a Wave from the Handheld” on page 185.

F2-START

Wave Information Ordrs: 0Lines: 0 0Units: 0 0Cube : 0 0

If you are using a zone-based picking style, such as sequential or simultaneous zone picking, enter the letter(s) and/or number(s) of the zone(s) from which you want to pick, and press ENTER. To enter more than one zone, simply key in all the letters and/or numbers, with no spaces between them.

If you are not using a zone-based picking style, or may pick from all zones, press [F9].



STARTING A DISPATCHER- OR SYSTEM-WAVED WAVE

You can start an already-created wave by doing either of the following:

• Scanning the picking/shipping label of a carton in each order in the wave. In this way you are actually re-creating your wave by specifying the orders you actually want to pick now. To use this method, follow the procedure in “Starting a Wave by Scanning Picking/Shipping Labels” below.

• Entering the wave number. This method forces you to pick all the orders in the wave. To use this method, follow the procedure in “Starting a Wave by Entering the Wave Number” on page 185.

To begin a wave from an already-waved out set of orders, you should have collected picking/shipping labels for the orders, as you will need to scan the barcode number on the labels to identify the orders and/or cartons to the system.

STARTING A WAVE BY SCANNING PICKING/SHIPPING LABELS

> To add orders to an already-generated wave:

1. From the Wave Information screen, scan a picking/shipping label for an order. If any special instructions are defined for the order, they are displayed, and you are prompted to confirm.

2. Press Y to confirm that you have or will perform the required processes, or press N to cancel adding the order to your wave. If you pressed Y, the order is automatically added to the wave.

1 8 3


The number of orders added to the wave so far are displayed in the right column, and the left column displays totals for the wave so far in all zones. The right column displays the lines, units, and cube for either the current order, or for the entire wave in the selected zone, depending on how your system is configured. In the example below, only totals for the order itself are displayed.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each sales order you want to add to your wave. If your system is configured to show wave totals in the right column, the total lines, units and cube are increased in the right column of the Wave Information screen for each order you add.

4. When you have added all orders to your wave and are ready to begin picking, press [F2]. The first pick in the wave is displayed. (If your system is configured to do so, the next pick in the wave may also be displayed.)

5. Begin to pick the wave by following any of the procedures in “Picking Orders” on page 191

F2-StartWave Information

Ordrs 1Lines : 2 2Units : 15 15Cube : 420 420

Total number of orders added to the wave so far.

Totals in the wave so far for all zones.

Totals in this order.

8 PACKS OF 25BIN :A4

LF522 Big Red8

Quantity and packsize to pick.

Bin for this pick.

Product to pick.

Quantity to pick.



STARTING A WAVE BY ENTERING THE WAVE NUMBER

> To start an already-generated wave:

1. From the Wave Information screen, enter the wave number. All of the orders in the wave are automatically added to your wave, and the first pick in the wave is displayed. (If your system is configured to do so, the next pick in the wave may also be displayed.)

2. Begin to pick the wave by following any of the procedures in “Picking Orders” on page 191

CREATING A WAVE FROM THE HANDHELD

You can only create a wave of orders from the handheld if your system is configured to allow picker waving, and no one else has waved out the orders. For each order you add to your wave, a picking/shipping label is automatically printed.

You can create a wave in two ways:

• By scanning or entering a packslip, or sales order, number. To do so, you will need printed order information, such as a pre-packslip label.

• By selecting the next available order from the system. Normally, you must select orders in a predetermined sequence, based on the priority, date and time required, and other criteria specified in the order itself.


LF522 Big Red8


Bin for this pick.

Product to pick.

Quantity to pick.

1 8 5


Both methods are described in the following procedure.

Note: If you are using simultaneous zone picking, you should not use the handheld to create waves of orders for this style of picking unless you are the first picker to work with the orders.

> To create a wave of sales orders:

1. From the Wave Information screen, add an order to the wave, by doing one of the following:

• At the F2-Start prompt, scan or enter the packslip (sales order) number of the order you want to add, and press ENTER.

• To select the highest priority ready to wave order from the system, press ENTER or [F4].

If the order you entered is not ready to wave, or there are no ready to wave orders, the message None Left is displayed. If your order is valid, or there are other ready to wave orders, the order details (lines, units, and cube) are displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add this order to your wave.

ZONE

CONFIRM(Y/N)198Ho Ho’s Good Time102 Rock River Rd.Lines : 1 1Units : 8 8Cube : 224 224

Sales order or packslip number.

Customer.

Totals for this order.

Totals in the wave so far.




If you accepted the order, if any special instructions are defined for the order, they are displayed, and you are prompted to confirm.

3. Press Y to confirm that you have or will perform the required processes, or press N to cancel adding the order to your wave. If you pressed Y, picking/shipping labels are printed for this order, and the order is added to the wave.

The number of orders added to the wave so far are displayed in the right column, and the left column displays totals for the wave so far in all zones. The right column displays the lines, units, and cube for either the current order, or for the entire wave in the selected zone, depending on how your system is configured. In the example below, only totals for the order itself are displayed.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each sales order you want to add to your wave. The total lines, units and cube are increased in the right column of the Wave Information screen for each order you add.

To accept this order in your wave and print a single picking/shipping label, press Y.

To accept this order in your wave and specify the number of labels you want, press [F7], and at the # Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want to print.

To reject this order from your wave, press N. You are returned to the Wave Information screen, unless order shopping is enabled, and you are selecting orders from the system. In this case, the next order is displayed, for you to accept or reject.

F2-StartWave Information

Ordrs 1Lines : 1 1 Units : 8 8Cube : 420 420

Total number of orders added to the wave so far.

Totals in the wave so far for all zones.

Totals in this order.

1 8 7


5. When you want to begin picking the wave, or there are no more ready to wave orders in the system and the message None Left is displayed, press [F2] to begin picking. The first pick in the wave is displayed. (If your system is configured to do so, the next pick in the wave may also be displayed.)

6. Collect your picking/shipping labels from the appropriate printer, and begin to pick the wave by following any of the procedures in “Picking Orders” on page 191.

STOPPING AND RESTARTING A PICK OR WAVE

While picking a wave of orders, you may need to stop and/or restart a pick or a wave to correct a pick, to pick the same wave as other pickers, either in sequence or simultaneously, or simply to take a break from your work. You also need to restart a new wave if your system is configured to force a manual restart for orders that have already been waved by the system or by a dispatcher.

To stop a wave, see “Stopping a Wave” below.

To restart a wave, see “Restarting a Wave” on page 190.


LF522 Big Red8


Bin for this pick.

Product to pick.

Quantity of product to pick.



STOPPING A WAVE

> To stop a wave:

1. Press [F1] at any point during a wave. If you have picked any lines in the wave, and your system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.


• To redo the pick, press Y, and you are redirected to this pick.

• To leave the last pick as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick.

• To exit the wave, press [F1] again. You are prompted to assemble the next wave.

Press Y to begin a new wave, or restart the one you stopped, or press N to return to the main menu.

BDG WAVE: 1005Interrupted! Redo?LF311Juicy Fruit100000012 300

End of Wave

Assemble nextwave ?

1 8 9


RESTARTING A WAVE

> To restart a wave:

1. From the Wave Information screen, do one of the following:

If any lines have already been picked in the wave, and your system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.

BDG WAVE: 1005Interrupted! Redo?LF311Juicy Fruit100000012 300

Yes/No

If your system is configured to allow automatic wave restart, scan a picking/shipping label for any order in the wave.

If your system is not configured to allow automatic wave restart, press [F3]. You are prompted to enter an order number or carton number for one of the orders in the wave.

Scan a picking/shipping label for any order in the wave, or enter the sales order number, and press ENTER. If the wave does not contain any previously picked lines, you are directed to the first pick.

WAVE RESTART

Enter wave # or a carton or PO from the wave.



Do one of the following:


• To leave the last pick as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick in the wave.

2. Continue by following any of the picking methods described in “Picking Orders” below.

PICKING ORDERS

Once you have started a wave of orders, you can simply begin to pick it if you are using the default regular wave picking style, as described in “Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking)” on page 193. However, if you are using other styles or techniques, you need to select the appropriate picking modes in which to pick, as described in the following section.

You may also print additional picking/shipping labels at any time during picking (except when prompted for a quantity).

Note: During picking, you may receive various other validation prompts that are not described in the following procedures.

1 9 1


UNDERSTANDING AND SELECTING PICKING MODES

Once you have created a wave of orders, the default regular wave picking style is presented. However, you can use the following function keys to toggle between different picking modes, even in the middle of the same wave.

Regular picking, batch picking, scanner picking and product picking involve different steps in the picking process. The forward/reverse picking modes merely determine the direction in which picks proceed — in forward zone/bin sequence, or in reverse zone/bin sequence. Thus, you can actually combine regular/batch picking with forward/reverse picking as follows (assuming you are starting from the default):

To use the regular picking steps, follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking)” on page 193.

To use the batch picking steps, follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Batch” on page 196.

Function Key Toggles between...

[F4] Batch picking and regular picking

[F9] Product picking and regular picking

[F5] Reverse picking and forward picking

[F8] Scanner picking and regular picking

To combine this style...

In this Direction...

Press these keys (in any order):

Regular Forward none

Reverse [F5]

Batch Forward [F4]

Reverse [F4][F5]



To use the product picking steps, follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Product” on page 199. (Product picking can not be combined with reverse picking, because you are not guided by the system; rather, you select the products you want to pick in the sequence you want.)

To use the scanner picking steps, follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit” on page 202. (Scanner picking can not be combined with reverse picking, because you are not guided by the system; rather, you select the products you want to pick in the sequence you want.)

To pick in reverse, press [F5] and follow the procedure in either “Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking)” on page 193 or “Picking Orders by Batch” on page 196. To return to forward picking, press [F5] again.

PICKING ORDERS BY WAVE (REGULAR PICKING)

For regular picking, you will need the picking/shipping labels for all your orders in your wave, as well as the appropriate number of shipping cartons in which to pack the products for each order.

If you want to pick your wave in reverse zone/bin sequence, optionally press [F5].

> To pick a wave of sales orders:

1. From the first picking screen, go to the bin displayed, and if your system requires that you confirm the bin, scan the bin’s barcode label.

Note: If you cannot fulfill this pick for any reason, see “Handling Picks You Cannot Fulfill” on page 206 for different ways of handling picks you cannot complete.

2. Optionally, if you need an additional carton and want to print a new label, press [F7].

1 9 3


3. Remove the quantity of the requested product, and scan the product’s barcode label to verify that you have picked the correct product, or if your system allows you to simply scan the bin (for dedicated bins only), scan the bin’s barcode label.


If any special instructions are defined for the product, they are displayed. Press ENTER to continue.

The carton/order for which this product is required is displayed.


• To view a list of cartons and their carton numbers for this order, press [F4]. If you select a carton from the list, you are prompted to scan the selected carton.

• To view special instructions for this order, press [F5]. If any instructions have been included for this order, they are displayed. When finished, press ENTER to return to the carton scanning screen.

• To print a baggie label for this product, press [F8].

Product picked.

PRODUCT> LF522 8*1>100000150( 3)Carton:

Ho Ho’s Good Time

102 Rock River Rd.

Big number appearing on picking/shipping label for this pick.

Carton number appearing on picking/shipping label for this pick.

Quantity to pick.

Customer for this pick.



5. Place the product into the appropriate carton or box according to the big number or carton number, and scan the barcode on the picking/shipping label.


If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are picking.

Otherwise, if you are picking more than one unit/packsize, or if this product is needed for more than one order, you are prompted to enter the quantity that you picked.

Note: If you are picking more than one order, your waves will have more than one carton. Take special care to ensure that you pack each product into the correct carton for the correct order.

6. Enter the quantity that you picked and press ENTER. If you enter a quantity greater than required, you may receive a warning, or you may be required to re-enter the quantity until it matches the expected number. If you enter a quantity less than required, you are prompted to re-enter the remaining quantity. If you are allowed to short the pick, you may do so by following the instructions in “Shorting a Pick” on page 207. When your quantity is accepted, the next pick is displayed.

7. If you are picking the same product for more than one order in your wave, repeat steps 2 to 6 until you have picked and packed the product for all orders in the wave.

PRODUCT> LF522 8>100000150Quantity:

100000150

ATT

1 9 5


8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until you have picked and packed all lines in the wave, and the End of Wave message is displayed. You are prompted to start picking another wave.

9. Press Y if you want to start picking another wave; otherwise, press N and you are returned to the main menu.

PICKING ORDERS BY BATCH

You can use batch pick labels — or none at all — to batch pick a wave of sales orders. When you batch pick, all items in the wave are moved to a temporary system location BATCHPCK. Once the products are picked to the BATCHPCK location, you (or other warehouse personnel) can use either regular picking, product picking or scanner picking modes to pack the products into shipping cartons. When you pack the batch-picked products into shipping cartons, you are actually picking all the products from the BATCHPCK location.

If you want to batch pick your wave in reverse zone/bin sequence, optionally press [F5].

Note: You can not use batch picking for orders with products with unique attributes, such as serial numbers.

End of Wave

Assemble nextwave ? Yes/No

ATT



> To batch-pick a wave of sales orders:

1. From the first pick screen, press [F4] to begin a batch pick. The message BATCH PICK is displayed at the bottom of the screen.


2. Go to the bin displayed, and if your system requires that you confirm the bin, scan the bin’s barcode label.

3. Remove the quantity of the requested product, and scan the product’s barcode label to verify that you have picked the correct product, or if your system allows you to simply scan the bin (for dedicated bins only), scan the bin’s barcode label.


If your system requires that you confirm the quantity that you actually picked, enter the quantity and press ENTER. The next pick is displayed.


LF522 Big Red8

BATCH PICK


Bin for this pick.

Product to pick.

Quantity of product to pick.

1 9 7


4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each product in your wave. When you have completed the remaining lines in the wave, Sage Accpac WMS switches to regular picking so you can pack the products you have picked.

5. Press ENTER. You are returned to the first picking screen.


• If you want to pack the products you have picked in the sequence you choose, follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Product” on page 199.

• If you want to pack the products you have picked by scanning each product unit separately, follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit” on page 202.

• If you want to pack the products in the sequence in which the system directs you, press ENTER, and follow the procedure in “Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking)” on page 193.

PICKING

There are nomore items to beBatch Picked.Changing toRegular Picking.



PICKING ORDERS BY PRODUCT

For product picking, you will need the picking/shipping labels for all your orders in your wave, as well as the appropriate number of shipping cartons for packing the products for each order.

Note: You can not use product picking for orders with products with attributes, such as lot or serial numbers.

> To product-pick a wave of sales orders:

1. From the first picking screen, press [F9] to start a product pick. The Product Picking screen is displayed

2. Each time the Product Picking screen is displayed, it is updated with the number of remaining picks.


ATT

* PRODUCT PICKING *3 Picks RemainScan Item:

F7: New Label

1 9 9


4. Scan the barcode label of the product that you want to pick, or enter the product number and press ENTER. If this product is required for your wave, the carton/order for which this product is required is displayed.



• To view a list of cartons and their carton numbers for this order, press [F4]. If you select a carton from the list, you are prompted to scan the selected carton.

• To view special instructions for this order, press [F5]. If any instructions have been included for this order, they are displayed. When finished, press ENTER to return to the carton scanning screen.

• To print a baggie label for this product, press [F8].

PRODUCT> LF551 8*1>100000004 (3)Carton:

The Candy Man

200 Grape St.

Product picked.

Big number appearing on picking/shipping label for this pick.

Carton number appearing on picking/shipping label for this pick.

Quantity to pick.

Customer for this pick.



6. Place the product into the appropriate carton or box according to the big number or carton number, and scan the barcode on the picking/shipping label.


If you are picking more than one unit/packsize, or if this product is needed for more than one order, you are prompted to enter the quantity that you picked.

Note: If you are picking more than one order, your waves will have more than one carton. Take special care to ensure that you pack each product into the correct carton for the correct order.

7. Enter the quantity that you picked and press ENTER, or press [F8] for the full quantity ordered. If you enter a quantity greater than required, you may receive a warning, or you may be required to re-enter the quantity until it matches the expected number. If you enter a quantity less than required, you are prompted to re-enter the remaining quantity. If you are allowed to short the pick, you may do so by following the instructions in “Shorting a Pick” on page 207. When your quantity is accepted, you are prompted to select another product.

PRODUCT> LF522 8>100000150Quantity:

100000150

2 0 1


8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until you have picked all lines in the wave, and the End of Wave message is displayed. You are prompted to start picking another wave.


PICKING ORDERS BY SCANNING EACH UNIT

For scanner picking, you will need the picking/shipping labels for all your orders in your wave, as well as the appropriate number of shipping cartons for packing the products for each order. Using scanner picking, you scan each item individually (like in a supermarket).

Note: You can not use scanner picking for orders with products with attributes, such as lot or serial numbers.

> To scanner-pick a wave of sales orders:

1. From the first picking screen, press [F8] to start scanner pick. The Scanner Picking screen is displayed.

End of Wave


ATT

SCANNER PICKINGCarton>Carton:

Scan cartonEnter - accept



2. Scan the barcode on the picking/shipping label. and you are prompted to scan the first item.


4. Scan the barcode label of the product that you want to pick, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


Place the item into the appropriate carton or box according to the big number or carton.

Note: If you are picking more than one order, your waves will have more than one carton. Take special care to ensure that you pack each item into the correct carton for the correct order.

Since each unit of the product is scanned individually, after each scan, the number of units scanned so far and the number of units remaining for the carton are updated

SCANNER PICKINGCarton>100000117Scan Item:

F6: Show RemainderF7: New LabelF8: Remainder Label

LF407Bin: A1042>100000117 (94)Packsize:1Scanned 4 of 6

LIfesaver Winteogreen

2 0 3


5. Optionally, press [F8] to print a list of the remaining items, or press [F6] to show the list of the remaining item and their current bin picking location on the screen.

Press ENTER until you are returned to the Scanner Picking screen.

6. Optionally, you can view:

• A list of cartons and their carton numbers for this order— press [F4]. If you select a carton from the list, you are prompted to scan the selected carton.

• Special instructions for this order,—press [F5]. If any instructions have been included for this order, they are displayed. When finished, press ENTER to return to the carton scanning screen.

7. Continue scanning items until you have scanned the entire quantity required for this product. You are prompted to select another product.

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until you have picked all lines in the wave, and the End of Wave message is displayed. You are prompted to start picking another wave.


PICK REMAIN 1/21: LF407 A1042: LF407 A1043: LF211 A1074: LF312 A1075: LF312 A1076: LF312 A107

End of Wave




PICKING ORDERS IN ONE SCAN

One-scan picking is only used in exceptional circumstances, when picking speed is more important than accuracy. If you are using one-scan picking, your system may be additionally configured to allow shorting during one-scan picking, or to prompt you to enter shipping information, and so on. In the following procedure, no additional options are described.

You will need to have the picking/shipping labels for your orders available for scanning.

> To one-scan pick:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick + Pack. The Picking menu is displayed. Select One-Scan Picking. You are prompted to scan a carton into which you will pack products for this order.

2. Pick the required products for your order, and pack them into the appropriate shipping cartons.

3. Scan the picking/shipping label for any carton in the order, or enter the order number, and press ENTER. A message is displayed confirming that your order is picked.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all orders in your wave.

5. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Picking menu.

ONE SCAN PICKING

Carton:

ONE SCAN PICKING

Carton:

ORDER PICKED!

2 0 5


HANDLING PICKS YOU CANNOT FULFILL

Occasionally, you may be sent to a pick which you cannot perform. While the system ensures that each order is not released unless there is enough stock in the warehouse to fill it, you will occasionally arrive at a bin that does not contain enough products to fill your order. This can happen if someone has moved the product without recording it in Sage Accpac WMS, the product has been damaged, or the dispatcher has allocated the order by assuming 100% stock. In other cases, the product may simply be difficult to reach or lift, may require special equipment to remove it, or even other personnel to assist with it.

In many warehouses, situations where inventory is short must be handled manually; that is, you must notify a dispatcher or supervisor, who will take an appropriate action, such as suspending the order, contacting the customer for alternative instructions, and so on. However, in other warehouses, your system may be configured to allow you to handle these situations automatically by:

• Skipping a pick

Skipping a pick allows you to temporarily skip a pick and return to it later. This feature is useful if the product is available, but not easily accessible for the time being, and you need to wait for assistance in picking it. You can also skip a pick in order to look for stock elsewhere in the warehouse and move it to the appropriate bin for picking later.(See “Moving/Putting Away Inventory” on page 65 for various ways of finding and moving product from other bins.) When you skip a pick, however, you are still required to fulfill the pick later, in order to complete the wave. To skip a pick, see the instructions in “Skipping a Pick” on page 207.

• Shorting a pick

Shorting a pick lets you ship an order with only partial quantities of products instead of putting the entire order on hold because a certain product is not available. You can either short an entire line, or you can short the quantity that is missing. Your system may be configured to automatically issue a back order for the products that are missing. To short a pick, see the instructions in “Shorting a Pick” on page 207.



SKIPPING A PICK

You can skip picks if your system is configured to allow you to do so.

> To skip a pick:

1. When you are prompted to scan a product or picking/shipping label in any of the picking modes, press [F2] to skip the pick. You are directed to your next pick. When you have completed picking the remaining lines in the wave, the system returns you to any skipped picks:

2. Press ENTER to return to the first skipped item.

3. Pick any remaining skipped items until all picks in the wave are complete.

SHORTING A PICK

You can short picks if your system is configured to do so. There are two ways to short a pick:

• Short a partial quantity. If there is some product available, and you want to ship this quantity, you can short just the quantity that is missing. To short a partial quantity, follow the steps in “Shorting a Partial Quantity” on page 208.

• Short an entire line. If there is no product available for the line, you can ship the order with no quantity of the ordered product. To short an entire line, follow the steps in “Shorting an Entire Line” on page 209.

PICKING

No More Picks.

Returning toSkipped Picks.

Enter - Continue

2 0 7


SHORTING A PARTIAL QUANTITY

> To short a partial quantity:

1. In regular or product picking, when prompted to enter the quantity for the product, enter the quantity you were able to pick, and press ENTER.

You are prompted you to scan the appropriate carton and enter the “remaining quantity” (the missing number of products).

2. To short the remaining quantity of this item, press [F6]. You are directed to the next pick.

3. Continue to pick the rest of the wave.

PRODUCT> LF551 100>100000025Quantity:50

100000025

Quantity ordered.

Enter the quantity you can pick here.

PRODUCT> LF551 50>100000025( 3)Carton:

100000025 50

Remaining quantity.

Quantity already picked.



SHORTING AN ENTIRE LINE

> To short an entire line:

1. While regular picking or batch picking, when prompted to pick a product, do not scan a product, but press [F6] to short the entire requested quantity. You are directed to the next pick.

2. Continue to pick the rest of the wave.

UNPICKING AN ORDER

The Unpick function lets you handle situations where an order is completely picked and ready to be shipped, and then there is a need to take items out of the order, return those items to stock and, of course, the customer is never invoiced for those items.

There rules for the Unpick function are as follows:

• You can only use the Unpick function for an order has been marked as ‘all picked’.

• Unpick is performed on a carton level, which means that all items in a carton are unpicked. Therefore, items that need to be shipped cannot be in the same carton as items that need to be unpicked. If an order has cartons that contain both, you must repack the order so that items that need to be unpicked are separated from items that will be shipped. Described in “Repacking Items” on page 230.

Repacking is not necessary if all items that need to be unpicked are already in a separate carton. For example, consider an order that has several cartons and there is no room on the truck for the last carton. If this carton will not be shipped at all, this carton can be unpicked.

The unpicked items are moved to the TRANSIT system locations. Then, the warehouse staff can use direct move to move the unpicked product to the desired bin as described in “Moving Products In” on page 80. The unpicked items are shorted on the order when it is uploaded to the host.

2 0 9


> To unpick products in carton.

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick + Pack and press ENTER. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to Repack and press ENTER. The Repack menu displays.

2. From the Repack menu press the corresponding to Unpick Cartons and press ENTER. You are prompted for the carton you want to unpick.

3. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The order number and customer are displayed and you are prompted to confirm that you want to unpick the items.

RePack 1/21-Repack Order2-Repack Carton3-Repack Item4-Relabel Carton5-Combine Cartons6-Unpick Cartons7-Mark as Repacked

RePack 2/2

1-Change Box Size2-Reprint SSCC-18

UNPICK CARTONS

Scan Carton

UNPICK CARTONS100000142Candy Co LtdAll items in carton will be unpicked moved to TRANSITare you sure? (Y/N)



4. Press Y to unpick the carton and move the products from the order to your TRANSIT location, or press N to cancel and re-enter a different carton.

If you press Y, you receive a confirmation that the carton has been unpicked and you are reminded to void the carton.

5. To unpick additional cartons, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Repack menu.

When products are unpicked, Sage Accpac WMS puts them in the TRANSIT system location. Later, you can move them the desired bins as described in “Moving Products In” on page 80.

ENTERING SALES ORDERS

If you have the appropriate permissions, you can use the Sales Order by Walking function to create orders on-the-fly for front-counter orders, or emergency orders which you do not want to process through the normal Sage Accpac WMS system. When you create a sales order on the handheld, it does not need to be allocated by the system; rather, it must be manually picked and packed from a bin which is known to have the required stock available.

UNPICK CARTONS

Scan Carton

* UNPICKED +Please Void Carton100000142

2 1 1


Entering a sales order involves the following steps:

1. Create the sales order. Follow the procedure in “Creating a Sales Order” on page 212.

2. Add lines to the order. Follow the procedure in “Adding Lines to a Sales Order” on page 214.

3. Optionally, edit lines in the order. Follow the procedure in “Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 217.

4. Optionally, delete lines in the order. Follow the procedure in “Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 219.

5. Optionally, re-open the order for editing. Follow the procedure in “Completing a Sales Order” on page 216.

6. Save the order. Follow the procedure in “Completing a Sales Order” on page 216.

CREATING A SALES ORDER

> To create a sales order:

1. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to Front Counter.


3. The SO by Walking screen displays. By default, a new sales order number is automatically generated, and you are prompted to enter the customer for the order.

SO by WalkingOrder #00000002Customer #

3PL



4. At the Customer # prompt, enter a customer number for this order, and press ENTER. If this is a new customer, you are prompted to create the customer in the database.

5. Press Y to add the new customer, or N to cancel and re-enter the customer number. If the customer already exists in the database, the customer name and location is displayed, and you are prompted to confirm this information.

6. Press Y to confirm that the customer is correct, or N to return to the first screen and re-enter the customer number. You are prompted to enter the customer’s purchase order number for this order.

SO by Walking00000002

Customer #

Add New Cust (Y/N)?


Customer #CDY321THE CANDY MANVancouverCONFIRM? (Y/N)


Customer #CDY321THE CANDY MANCustomer Po #

2 1 3


7. At the Customer PO# prompt, enter the customer’s purchase order number for this order, or press ENTER to skip entering a purchase order. A new line is created (it is displayed as 0 before you select a product for the line).

8. To continue, follow the steps in “Adding Lines to a Sales Order” on page 214.

ADDING LINES TO A SALES ORDER

> To add lines to a sales order:

1. At the Product prompt, scan the barcode label of the product for this line, or enter the product number and press ENTER. If you try to enter a product for which no stock is available, you receive an error message. To correct this, press ENTER and at the Cancel Order? prompt, press Y to cancel the order, or N to enter a new product.

A list of bins in which the product is currently stored is displayed.

SOBWA - LINE # 0 00000002CDY321THE CANDY MANProduct:

SOBWA-00000002 1/1LOCATION:1:BULK1- 4*25002:C1- 23* 253:D1- 5* 254:D1 1* 100



2. To select a bin from which you want to pick the product, if necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, and press the number corresponding to the desired bin. You are prompted to enter the quantity required of this product.

3. At the Quantity prompt, enter the number of packs required and press ENTER. The line is added to the order, as indicated by the 1 that now appears at the top of the screen.


• To add more products to the order or to add more bins from which you want to pick the same product, repeat this procedure.

• To modify this line, follow the procedure in “Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 217.

• To delete this line, follow the procedure in “Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 219.

• To complete the order, follow the procedure in “Completing a Sales Order” on page 216.

SOBWA - LINE # 0 00000002LF211 Spearmint GumC1Quantity:

SOBWA - LINE # 1 00000002CDY321 THE CANDY MANProduct:

F5-DELETE F6-MODIFY

2 1 5


COMPLETING A SALES ORDER

> To complete a sales order:

1. When you have added all necessary lines to your order, after completing a line item, press ENTER to save the order. You are prompted to confirm the completion of the order.

2. Select from the following options:

If you selected N in step 2, modify or delete a line item, by following the procedures in “Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 217 or “Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 219.

SO By Walking00000002# Lines: 2

Save (Y/N/C)

Press To...

Y Save the sales order.

N Modify or delete or a line in the order.

C Cancel the order altogether and return to the SO By Walking menu. Press [F1] if you want to return to the Picking Menu



Otherwise, if your system is configured for the order to be created, carton labels are printed for the order and you are prompted to scan the carton number.

3. Scan the barcode on the carton label, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. You are returned to the Picking menu.

4. Pack the product into the appropriate carton.

EDITING A LINE ITEM IN A SALES ORDER

You can only edit a line item in a sales order before you have saved the order.

> To edit a line item:

1. After entering a complete line, or after pressing N when prompted to save an order, press [F6] to modify any line in the order. You are prompted to enter the product number of the line you want to modify.

SO By WalkingOrder#00000002Scan Totlabel

SOBWA - MODIFY QTYProduct:

2 1 7


2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to identify the bin from which you were to pick the product.

3. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The quantity you originally requested for the order is displayed, and you are prompted to enter a new quantity.

4. Enter the new quantity and press ENTER. The message Qty Modified is displayed.


• To modify another line, repeat this procedure.

• To add more products to the order or to add more bins from which you want to remove the same product, follow the procedure in “Adding Lines to a Sales Order” on page 214.

• To delete a line in the order, follow the procedure in “Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 219.


SOBWA - MODIFY QTYProduct:LF211Bin:

SOBWA - MODIFY QTYLF211Spearmint GumC1Quantity Picked:1Quantity To Pick:



DELETING A LINE ITEM IN A SALES ORDER

You can only delete a line from a sales order before you have saved the order.

> To delete a line item from a sales order:

1. After entering a complete line, or after pressing N when prompted to save an order, press [F5] to delete any line in the order. You are prompted to enter the product number of the line you want to delete.

2. Scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to identify the bin from which you were to pick the product.

SOBWA - DELETE LINEProduct:

SOBWA - MODIFY QTYProduct:LF211Bin:

2 1 9


3. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The quantity you originally requested for the order is displayed, and you are prompted to confirm the line deletion.

4. Press Y to delete the line, or press N to cancel. If you select Y and there are no other line items in your order, you are returned to the product selection screen to create a new line item.

5. To continue, do one of the following:

• To add other products to the order, follow the procedure in “Adding Lines to a Sales Order” on page 214.

• To delete another line in the order, repeat this procedure.

• To modify another line in the order, follow the procedure in “Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order” on page 217.


SOBWA - MODIFY QTYLF211Spearmint GumC1Qty Picked:3 * 25DELETE LINE(Y/N)



7 REPACKING ORDERS

UNDERSTANDING REPACKING FUNCTIONS

Once an order has been packed into a carton, you can move part, or all, of its contents into a different carton, or into additional cartons, before shipping it. This process is called repacking.

You might want to repack a carton if it was overstuffed, poorly packed, or damaged somewhere between the picking/packing and shipping stages. You can also use repacking to consolidate several cartons that were picked and packed simultaneously in multiple warehouse areas but belong to the same order. You may also need to repack cartons in order to unpick items that were packed for an order. For more information about unpicking cartons see “Unpicking an Order” on page 209.

Several functions are available for repacking orders:

• Repack Order

This function repacks all the cartons in an order into new or existing cartons, by ‘unpicking’ all of the items and moving them into the BATCHPCK location just as if the order had been batch picked. It then allows you to ‘repick’ the order using any picking method, although typically you would product pick, so that you can select the products you want to repack in the sequence you want. Use this function when your order consists of a single carton, or you need to repack all the cartons in an order; follow the procedure in “Repacking Entire Orders” on page 224.

2 2 1


• Repack Carton

This function repacks one carton into a new or existing carton, by ‘unpicking’ all of the items in a carton and moving them into the BATCHPCK location just as if those items had been batch picked. It then allows you to ‘repick’ the items using any picking method, although typically you would product pick, so that you can select the products you want to repack in the sequence you want. Use this function when your order consists of multiple cartons, but you only need to repack one or some of them; follow the procedure in “Repacking Cartons” on page 226.

• Repack Item

This function repacks one product into a new or existing carton. This option does not ‘unpick’ and then re-pick products into their new carton. Instead, it simply transfers items between two cartons. Use this function when your order consists of one or multiple cartons, but you only need to repack one or some of the items from the order; follow the procedure in “Repacking Items” on page 230.

• Combine Cartons

This function repacks all the items from one carton into an existing carton. This option does not ‘unpick’ and then re-pick products into their new carton. Instead, it simply transfers items between two cartons. Use this function when your order consists of multiple cartons, but can be repacked more efficiently into fewer cartons. Combining cartons is described in “Combining Cartons in an Order” on page 232.

• Relabel Carton

This function prints a new carton label. Use this function when you simply need to replace the label on a carton. Relabelling cartons is described in “Relabeling Cartons” on page 233.

• Change Box

This function lets you change the box size. Use this function when you need to pack the items in a different size box than originally designated for the carton. Changing box sizes is described in “Changing a Carton Size” on page 234.

2 2 2 C H A P T E R 7 R E P A C K I N G O R D E R S


• Marking a Carton as Repacked

If an order requires that it must be repacked before the order can go out the door, use the Mark as Repacked function to indicate when the repack process has been completed. Described in “Marking a Carton As Repacked” on page 236.

If you need to stop and restart repacking, follow the procedures in “Stopping and Restarting Repacking” on page 228.

All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Repack menu.

> To access the Repack menu:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick + Pack and press ENTER. The Picking menu is displayed.

2. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to RePack and press ENTER. The Repack menu displays.

RePack 1/21-Repack Order2-Repack Carton3-Repack Item4-Relabel Carton5-Combine Cartons6-Unpick Cartons7-Mark as Repacked

RePack 2/2

1-Change Box Size2-Reprint SSCC-18

2 2 3


REPACKING ENTIRE ORDERS

> To repack an order:

1. From the Repack menu, press 1 to select Repack Order. You are warned that the lines picked for the order will be moved into the temporary location BATCHPCK.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of one of the cartons in the order, or enter the carton number, or the order number, and press ENTER. The total number of lines, units, and cube for the order are displayed.

REPACK PICKINGScan a Carton

ALL Goods PickedFor this OrderWill be Reset toBATCHPCK !!

REPACK: F2-START199Lines: 2Units: 1000Cube: 56000

# Labels:



3. If you need additional cartons, and need to print picking/shipping labels for them, at the # Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want and press ENTER; otherwise simply press ENTER or press [F2]. The regular wave picking screen is displayed.


8 PACKS OF 25BIN:C2

LF408Tic Tac Freshmint200>10000105 (18)

If you want to continue by repacking products into cartons in the sequence in which the system directs you, follow steps 3 to 8 in “Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking)” on page 193.

If you want to repack products in the sequence you choose, press [F9] to repack by product. The Product Repack screen is displayed.

Optionally, if you need an additional carton and want to print a new label, press [F7].

To continue, follow steps 4 to 9 in “Picking Orders by Product” on page 199 of “Picking and Packing Orders”.

PRODUCT REPACK2 Picks RemainScan Item:

F7: New Label

2 2 5


REPACKING CARTONS

> To repack a carton:

1. From the Repack menu, press 2 to select Repack Carton. You are warned that the lines picked for the order will be moved into the temporary location BATCHPCK.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton you want to repack, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The total number of line and units for the carton are displayed.

3. If you need additional cartons, and need to print picking/shipping labels for them, at the # Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want and press ENTER; otherwise simply press ENTER or press [F2]. The regular wave picking screen is displayed.

REPACK PICKINGScan a Carton

ALL Goods PickedFor this CartonWill be Reset toBATCHPCK !!

REPACK F2-START176Carton:100000009Lines: 2Units: 300

# Labels:

1 PACKS OF 100BIN:C3

LF600Breath Savers Wintergreen1>100000018




If you want to continue by repacking products into cartons in the sequence in which the system directs you, follow steps 3 to 8 in “Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking)” on page 193 of “Picking and Packing Orders”.

If you want to repack products in the sequence you choose, press [F9] to repack by product. The Product Repack screen is displayed.

Optionally, if you need an additional carton and want to print a new label, press [F7].

To continue, follow steps 4 to 9 in “Picking Orders by Product” on page 199 of “Picking and Packing Orders”.

PPRODUCT REPACK2 Picks RemainScan Item:

F7: New Label

2 2 7


STOPPING AND RESTARTING REPACKING

While repacking a carton, you may need to interrupt the repacking process. Procedures for stopping and restarting repacking operations are provided below.

> To stop repacking:

1. Press [F1] at any point during repacking. If you have repacked any lines in the order or carton, and your system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.



• To leave the last pick as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick.

• To exit the function, press [F1] again. You are prompted to assemble the next wave. Press Y to begin a new order to repack, or press N to return to the main menu.

BDG W: 1005Interrupted! Redo?LF311Juicy Fruit100000012 300



> To restart repacking:

1. From the Repack menu, press 1 to select Repack Order. You are warned that the lines picked for the order will be moved into the temporary location BATCHPCK.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of one of the cartons in the order, or enter the carton number, or the order number, and press ENTER. If any lines have already been repacked for the order, and your system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.


• To redo all picks, press Y, and you are directed to the first pick in the order.

• To leave all picks as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick in the order.

4. Repack the items in the carton as necessary.

REPACK PICKINGScan an Order

ALL Goods PickedFor this OrderWill be Reset toBATCHPCK !!

REPACK PICKING195CDY321The Candy Man

Reset CompletedPicks (Y/N)?

2 2 9


REPACKING ITEMS

> To repack an item:

1. From the Repack menu, press 3 to select Repack Item. You are prompted to scan the carton from which you want to move the item.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. You are prompted to scan the carton to which you want to move the item.

3. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. You are prompted to scan the product you wish to repack.

PACKING:

Please Scan‘FROM’ Carton

PACKING:203From: 100000004

Scan ‘TO’ Carton

PACKING:203From: 100000004To: 100000008

Scan Product



4. Scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number, and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the quantity to move.

Note: If you change your mind and want to undo a repack, you can press [F2] to ‘unpack’ the item back into its original carton.

5. Repack the desired number of items, and enter the number of units/packs you moved and press ENTER. A message is displayed confirming the move.

6. To move another product from the carton, press ENTER and repeat steps 2 to 5.


PACKING:203From: 100000004To: 100000008> LF522

Enter Quantity

PACKING:203From: 100000004To: 100000008

LF522* MOVED 100 *

2 3 1


COMBINING CARTONS IN AN ORDER

> To combine cartons in an order:

1. From the Repack menu, press 5 to select Combine Cartons. You are prompted to scan the first carton from which you want to move the products.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. You are prompted to scan the carton to which you want to move the products.

3. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. A message is displayed confirming the move.

COMBINE CARTONS

Scan FROM Carton

COMBINE CARTONS203Sweet Thoughts500 Garden Ave.

Scan TO Carton

COMBINE CARTONS

Scan FROM Carton

* COMBINED *100000009Should be Empty



4. Repack all the items into the new carton, and physically dispose of the old carton. (The carton label number will be deleted automatically.)

5. To combine additional cartons, press ENTER and repeat the procedure.


RELABELING CARTONS

> To relabel a carton:

1. From the Repack menu, press 4 to select Relabel Carton. You are prompted to scan the label you want to replace.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The order number, and the number of products and total units in the carton are displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to relabel the carton:

REPACK PICKINGScan a carton

Scan a carton to re-label.

REPACK PICKING104Items: 3Units: 500

FROM: 100000101New Label? Yes/No?

2 3 3


3. Press Y to relabel this carton; otherwise, press N and you are returned to the previous screen. If you pressed Y, a new picking/shipping label is generated, and the new carton number is displayed.

4. Collect the new label from the printer, remove the old label from your carton, and affix the new label to the carton. All products assigned to the old label are now assigned to the new label.

5. Press ENTER to continue. You are returned to the first Relabel Carton screen.

6. To relabel more cartons, repeat steps 2 to 5.


CHANGING A CARTON SIZE

> To change a carton:

1. From the Repack menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Change Box Size. You are prompted to scan the carton label for which you want to choose a new box size.

REPACK PICKING194Relabel Carton100000101to100000113

Enter – Continue

CHANGE BOX SIZE

Carton:



2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The carton number, and the current box size are displayed, and you are prompted to enter the new box size.

3. Type the new box size and press ENTER. You receive a message that the box size is changed, and then you can enter a different carton to change size

4. To change additional box sizes, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Repack menu.

CHANGE BOX SIZE

Carton100000055

Current Size: 5New Box Size:

CHANGE BOX SIZE

Carton:

Box Sizes Changed

2 3 5


MARKING A CARTON AS REPACKED

An order may be configured by an end-of-line process to require that cartons be repacked before the order can be shipped. Once the repack is completed, you must use the Mark as Repacked function to inform ACCPAC WMS that it is done and mark the order as ready to upload. Mark as repacked is only used on cartons that are configured to require a Repack end-of-line process.

> To mark a carton as repacked:

1. From the Repack menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Mark as Repacked. You are prompted to scan the carton label for the carton you wish to mark as repacked.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. A message is received that the carton is marked as repacked, indicating that the required end-of-line process is completed.

3. To mark additional cartons as repacked, repeat step 2.

4. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Repack menu.

MARK AS REPACKED

Carton:

MARK AS REPACKED

Carton:

Mark as Repacked



8 SHIPPING ORDERS

UNDERSTANDING SHIPPING FUNCTIONS

The Sage Accpac WMS shipping functions you use in your warehouse will depend on a number of factors, including the type of automated shipping system you use, if any, your system configuration, the carrier handling a given order, and whether weights are recorded for products in your WMS database.

If you are using a fully integrated shipping system, such as Clippership, and weights are recorded in the Sage Accpac WMS database for all your products in the warehouse, you may not need to perform any shipping functions in WMS at all. However, most warehouses use at least one of the following functions to obtain and provide carton and order shipping information to WMS:

• Carton Shipping

This function allows you to scan shipping cartons and weigh them. You typically use this function in the following circumstances:

• Your warehouse uses a partially integrated shipping system, such as UPS Worldship, Fedex, or Imagine. Carton weights and shipping information are sent to the shipping systems so that the cartons can be rated and manifested, and the rating/cost information is automatically sent back to Sage Accpac WMS.

• Your warehouse uses an integrated shipping system, such as ClipperShip and NeoPost, but weights or dunnage factors have not been recorded for the products in the orders, or you are handling orders that require additional, manual processing on the shipping system. Carton weights are sent to the shipping system, which can then rate and manifest the order, and the rating/cost information is automatically sent back to Sage Accpac WMS.

• An order has been case-picked without a handheld. The Carton Shipping function serves to ‘pick’ the product from inventory.

SHIP

SHIP

2 3 7


• You want to check the status of a shipping carton.

• You want to view or override shipping errors.

• You want to re-weigh shipping cartons so that the integrated shipping system can re-rate them, after shipping errors have been corrected or cleared.

Depending on the shipping processes specified for the order, the order may be marked as shipped as soon as the cartons are scanned in this function, or when shipping has been confirmed by the integrated shipping system.

The Carton Shipping function is described in “Processing Shipping Cartons” on page 240.

• Record Shipment

You use this function to manually record shipment information for orders, including final costs, shipment numbers, and so on. You typically use this function in the following circumstances:

• Your warehouse uses a standalone shipping system, a partially integrated shipping system, such as Disticom, Canpar, Canada Post, and UPS, or no shipping system. You scan and weigh cartons on the shipping system, and then use the Record Shipment function to enter the data you have obtained from the shipping system (or by a manual process).

• Your warehouse uses a fully integrated shipping system, but you need to record additional or special shipment information that may not normally be provided to WMS by your shipping system.

2 3 8 C H A P T E R 8 S H I P P I N G O R D E R S


Additional shipping functions that you may use on the handheld include the following:

• Handling shipping errors — You use the Carton Shipping function to display and, optionally, override any shipping errors that have been encountered by orders when an integrated shipping system has attempted to rate and manifest them. Described in “Handling Shipping Errors” on page 245.

• Re-rating cartons — You use the Carton Shipping function to resend shipping information and weights to an integrated shipping system for automatic re-rating, after shipping errors have been corrected, or any shipment information has been modified. Described in “Re-rating Cartons” on page 248.

• Capturing additional barcodes for cartons — You use the Carton Shipping function to capture an additional barcode that may have been generated by an external shipping system, such as a track-trace number. Capturing the barcode allows you to associate this code with the carton and pass this information to the accounting system during upload from Sage Accpac WMS. Described in “Capturing Additional Barcodes” on page 259.

• Adding cartons to pallets — You can use the Add to Pallet function to associate cartons with a ‘pallet’, for shipping purposes. Described in “Adding Cartons to Pallets” on page 261.

• Marking an external process complete — If an order requires that an external or manual process be executed before the order can go out the door, you must use the Mark External function to indicate when the process has been completed. Described in “Marking External Processes Complete” on page 264.

• Stage order and ship staged orders — To organize cartons for shipment out of the warehouse, you can gather out-going cartons in a staging area, according to truck route or other criteria. Then, you can ship the staged orders that were collected out of the warehouse.

All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Shipping menu.

SHIP

2 3 9


> To access the Shipping menu:

From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Shipping. The Shipping menu is displayed.

PROCESSING SHIPPING CARTONS

The Carton Shipping function allows you to weigh a carton, check its status, and optionally, print an additional paper packslip, capture additional barcodes, and have cartons re-rated by an integrated shipping system.

At a minimum, you will be prompted to scan the carton. You may also be required to enter the weight, carton size and dunnage weight and/or to scan an additional barcode. Finally, any special instructions that have been specified for the order are displayed to you here.

> To check in cartons:

1. From the Shipping menu, press the number corresponding to Carton Shipping. You are prompted to select the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons.

SHIPPING 1/21-Stage Order2-Ship Staged Order3-Add to Pallet4-Carton Shipping5-Record Shipment6-Reprint Packslip7-Mark External

SHIPPING 2/21-Show Bignumber2-Carton Lookup

Select Scale1) No Weight2) Manual Weight3) Scale #14) Scale #2




You are prompted to enter the carton you want to process, and if there are any shipping errors in the system, a message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.


• To reprint a Crystal (paper) packslip for the carton, press [F7]. The message Reprint appears at the bottom of the screen.

• To view shipping errors, follow the instructions in “Handling Shipping Errors” on page 245.

• To have a shipping system re-rate the carton, press [F4]. The message Rating appears at the bottom of the screen.

• To capture an additional barcode for the carton, press [F6], and at the Barcode prompt that appears, scan the barcode.

CARTON SHIPPINGCarton:

22 SHIP ERRORS

If all your cartons already have accurate weights recorded for the products they contain, the system is configured to automatically calculate the dunnage for the cartons, and you do not need to weigh them again, press 1.

If you have weigh scales connected to Sage Accpac WMS and you want to use one of them to capture the shipping weight of each carton, press 3 to use Scale #1 or press 4 to use Scale #2 (where available).

If you have a weigh scale that is not connected to Sage Accpac WMS and you want to use it to weigh each carton, and enter the information manually, press 2.

2 4 1


4. At the Carton prompt, scan the picking/shipping label for the carton you want to process, or enter the carton number and press ENTER.

Note: If you are using Scale #1 or Scale #2 to capture the shipping weight of your carton, make sure that the carton is on your selected scale before you scan its label or enter its label number. When you scan or enter the picking label for that carton, its weight is captured.

If the carton you scanned has already been processed, or cannot be processed, any of the following statuses may be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Message/Status

Indicates...

INVALID CARTON!

This carton number does not exist, or the carton is empty.

WAITING for RATE

The order was marked to be automatically rated and manifested by the shipping system and the carton is still waiting to be rated and manifested.

RATING ERROR (or a specific error message)

The order was marked to be automatically rated and manifested by the shipping system and the carton has encountered a rating error as the shipping system attempted to rate and manifest it.

SHIP’D -STILL MORE

The carton has been marked as shipped. There are still picks left in this order.

SHIPPED The carton has been marked as shipped. The entire order has been picked.

ALREADY GONE The order with this carton has already been uploaded, but this carton has not yet been marked as shipped.

ALREADY SHIPPED

The order with this carton has already been uploaded, and this carton has already been marked as shipped.



If you receive one of these messages, scan another carton, or press ENTER to exit this function and return to the Shipping menu.

If you selected No Weight in step 2, and if any products in your carton do not have a weight recorded, this message is displayed:

Exit the function, by pressing [F1], re-enter the function, and at the Select Scale screen, select 2 to manually enter a weight.

If you chose to manually enter the weight for your carton, you are prompted to enter it now.


NEED A WEIGHT!

CARTON SHIPPINGCarton:100000056Weight:

2 4 3


5. Enter the shipping weight of your carton and press ENTER. If your system is configured to prevent cartons from being rated and manifested by a shipping system outside of a certain window of time (e.g. three days before the required date of the carton), the required date for the order is displayed.

Put the carton aside until the time when it can be processed by the shipping system, or notify your dispatcher, who can override this setting, if necessary. Press ENTER to continue.

If there are hold messages or special instructions for this carton, they are displayed now.

6. Perform the task as prompted, and press ENTER. If you are required to scan an additional barcode, such as an extra shipping label you may have printed from an external shipping system, you are prompted to do so.

CARTON SHIPPINGCarton:100000056Hold CartonREQD 20001204

CARTON SHIPPINGCarton:100000056Hold CartonApply special packaging

CARTON SHIPPINGBarcode:



7. Scan the barcode label. A message appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating that the carton has been processed.

8. To process additional cartons, repeat steps 2 to 7.

9. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Shipping menu.

HANDLING SHIPPING ERRORS

Each time you start the Carton Shipping function, WMS checks all cartons for any outstanding shipping errors which may have been incurred during the rating and manifesting process. Common problems include carton weights of zero and incorrect or missing postal/zip codes. These shipping errors need to be corrected before the cartons can be rated.

For cartons with shipping errors, you have the following options:

• Notify the dispatcher. For errors that result from incorrect data in the order, the dispatcher will correct the order and notify the shipping system from Web Dispatch to have the order re-rated.

• Take the appropriate measures to correct the source of the problem. For missing weight errors, you must weigh the cartons and have them re-rated.

• Bypass the rating process and automatically mark the cartons ‘shipped’. You can use this option if you want to manually process the carton on the shipping system.


100000056 SCANNED

2 4 5


> To view shipping errors:

1. From the Shipping menu, press 5 to select Carton Shipping. You are prompted to select the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons:

2. Press 1 to skip entering a weight. If there are any shipping errors in the system, a message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

3. Press [F5] to find out which cartons have shipping errors. A list of cartons and their associated shipping errors is displayed.



22 SHIP ERRORS

Ship Errs 1/1Select Carton:1:100000001 Weight2:100000002 Weight3:100000003 No Car



4. Optionally, press ENTER to view additional screens of cartons, and press the number corresponding to a carton whose details you want to view.

Note: Up to 100 cartons with rating errors can be displayed. If your system has more than 100 cartons with errors, the Web dispatcher can run a Shipping Errors report to view all of them.

The shipping details for that carton’s order are displayed.


• If the carton is missing a weight (indicated by the message Weight must be greater than 0), enter a weight and re-rate the carton; for instructions, see “Re-rating Cartons” on page 248.

• Notify the dispatcher, who will determine the appropriate means of correcting the error.

• To force this carton to be marked as ‘shipped’ without correcting its rating, press [F6]. The message SHIPPED appears at the bottom of the screen. The carton will bypass the shipping system, and will not be rated or included on a shipping manifest.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all cartons with errors that you want to process.

7. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Shipping menu.

SHIPPING ERROR 197 CARTON:100000001 SHPVIA: UPS SERVCE: OPTION: ERR:Weight must be greater than 0

2 4 7


RE-RATING CARTONS

Re-rating a carton allows you to manually send a carton to the integrated shipping system to be rated and manifested. You can re-rate a carton to correct weight-related shipping errors, or if the carrier or service for the order has been changed since the order was initially rated.

> To re-rate a carton:

1. From the Shipping menu, press 5 to select Carton Shipping. You are prompted to select the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons.


• If you have weigh scales connected to Sage Accpac WMS, press 3 to use Scale #1 or press 4 to use Scale #2 (where available).

• If you have a weigh scale that is not connected to WMS, and you want to enter the weight manually, press 2.

Note: Do not select the No Weight option, as entering a carton weight of zero will cause a rating error on the shipping system.




You are prompted to enter the carton you want to process.

3. Press [F4]. A message appears, indicating that the carton will be re-rated.

Note: If you are using Scale #1 or Scale #2 to capture the shipping weight of your carton, make sure that the carton is on your selected scale before you scan its label or enter its carton number. When you scan or enter the picking/shipping label for that carton, its weight is captured.

4. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton you want to process, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. If you chose to weigh your cartons on a scale not connected to WMS, you are prompted to enter the weight of the carton.



RATING...

CARTON SHIPPINGCarton:100000056Weight:

2 4 9


5. Enter the shipping weight of your carton and press ENTER. A message appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating that the carton has been processed.

6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all cartons with errors that you want to process.


RECORDING SHIPMENT DETAILS

The Record Shipment function allows you to manually record shipping information for orders or cartons. You can use this function if your warehouse is not using an integrated shipping system, or if the carton that you are shipping requires special instructions that your integrated shipping system is not set up to perform automatically.

Your system will be configured to require that you provide information for only one carton in an order, or for each carton in an order. Also, for each carton you record, certain details may be optional, while others may be required. For required details, you are prompted to enter each one. For optional details, you can display a menu from which you can select the details you want to provide, or skip entering them altogether.


100000056 SCANNED



There are two types of shipment details that may be configured as required, optional, or not required: shipment details, and carton details. Shipment details provide information about the entire shipment, which may include several cartons. The full set of shipment details includes the following:

Shipment Detail

Explanation

Ship Date The date that the carton (or order) will leave the warehouse. The date format is MMDDYY.

Pickup (BOL/Manifest) Number

A number that identifies a group of orders shipped on the same truck or picked up at the same time by one carrier.

Ship Via The carrier by which the carton will be shipped.

Service The service by which the carton will be shipped, as defined by your chosen carrier (e.g. Next Day, 3 Day, Express).

Ship Zone The geographical zone to which the goods are shipped, as defined by your chosen carrier.

Shipment Cost The total cost of shipping all cartons in the order.

Shipment Weight

The total weight of all cartons in the order.

Payment method

The method of payment for the shipping costs. Payment types include:

P – Prepaid

C – Consignee

B – Bill Recipient

T – Third-Party

Your warehouse may also have other defined payment types.

Customer Payment Account

The account number to which the shipping costs will be charged. Shipping costs will only be charged to this account if the Payment Type is set to B (see above).

2 5 1


Carton details provide information about each carton in the order. The full set of carton details includes the following:

Cost Centre The customer’s company division that will be charged for the shipping costs, for customers who want to associate shipping costs with a specific division in their company.

Declared Value

The value of the carton insured by the carrier for loss or damage.

Declared Value Authorization

The number assigned by the carrier if insurance for this carton has been arranged.

Special Services

Any services requested of the carrier for this order, as defined by the carrier.

Shipment Number

A unique number assigned to all cartons shipped together in one shipment (such as all the cartons in one order). In single carton shipments, the shipment number is the same as the track & trace number for the carton.

Carton Detail

Explanation

Carton Cost The cost of shipping a single carton.

Carton Weight The weight of a single carton.

Carton Cube The cube of a single carton.

Shipment Detail

Explanation



> To record the shipping information for an order:

1. From the Shipping menu, press 3 to select Record Shipment. You are prompted to enter the carton for which you want to record shipping information.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton for which you want to record shipping information, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. If the carton has already been processed, you are prompted to re-record its shipping information.

3. Press [F2] to re-record shipment information, or press ENTER to select another carton.

Order details, as well as the number of cartons that have been processed for the order so far (0 to start), are displayed.

SHIPPING Aug 27

Carton:

000000020 That carton is shipped!

f2-Ship Again Enter-skip

SHIPPING Aug 27The Candy Man195 00 Carton(s)

f1: QuitEnter-continue

2 5 3


4. Press ENTER to record the shipping information for this carton. You are prompted to enter the first required shipment detail. If any information is already recorded for this item, it is displayed as a default.

5. Enter the required information, or press ENTER to accept the default. You are prompted to enter the next required detail.

Note: If you are prompted to enter the total shipment cost and/or total shipment weight, and are shipping each carton in an order as a separate shipment, do not enter a value at this prompt, but leave the default of 0.00. You will be re-prompted to enter the shipment cost and weight for each carton after any optional details have been collected.

6. Repeat step 5 for all required details, as described in the shipment details table on page 250. When you have provided all required details, if any details are configured by your system as optional, you are prompted to display the Shipment options menu.

SHIPPING Aug 27The Candy Man195 0

Enter Ship Date:

Default: 082702


Enter ShipmentOptions (Y/N):

Enter-no



7. Press Y to display the Shipment options menu, or press N or ENTER to skip entering optional details. If you pressed N, continue by going to step 11; if you pressed Y, the Shipment options menu is displayed.

8. If necessary, press ENTER to display an additional screen of details, and press the number corresponding to the first optional shipment detail you want to provide. You are prompted to enter the appropriate information. If any information is already recorded for this item, it is displayed as a default.

9. Enter the required information, or press ENTER to accept the default. You are returned to the Shipment options menu, from which you can select another detail to provide.

10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each detail you want to provide, and when done, press ENTER.

SHIPMENT 1/1Select Option:1:Declared Value2:Dcl Val Authr#3:Special Servcs


Enter Declared Value:

Default: 0.00

2 5 5


11. If you did not provide shipment cost or weight information initially, when re-prompted, enter the cost and/or weight for the carton at each prompt, and press ENTER. If any carton details have been configured as optional, you are prompted to display the Carton options menu.

12. Press Y to display the Carton options menu, or press N or ENTER to skip entering optional details. If you pressed N, continue by going to step 17. If you pressed Y, the Carton options menu is displayed.

13. Press the number corresponding to the first optional carton detail you want to provide. You are prompted to enter the appropriate information. If any information is already recorded for this item, it is displayed as a default.

14. Enter the required information, or press ENTER to accept the default. You are returned to the Carton options menu, from which you can select another detail to provide.


Enter CartonOptions (Y/N):

Enter-no

CARTON 1/1Select Option:1:Carton Cube


Enter the cube of this carton:

Default: 0.00



15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for each carton detail you want to provide, and when done, press ENTER. When you have entered all information, if your system is configured to allow you to scan a single carton for the order, a message is displayed at the bottom of the screen indicating that the order has been fully recorded.

To record additional shipments, repeat the procedure; otherwise, press ENTER to return to the Shipping menu.

If your system is configured to require you to scan all cartons in an order, you are prompted to scan the next carton.

SHIPPING Aug 27Carton:

Done


Scan or enter the carton#:

f5: view/select

2 5 7



17. If you did not provide shipment cost or weight information for the entire order initially, and you are prompted to enter the information for this carton, provide the appropriate information and press ENTER. You are prompted to display the Carton options menu.

18. Press Y, and follow steps 13 to 15.

19. Repeat steps 16 to 18 for all remaining cartons in the order.


Enter CartonOptions (Y/N):

Enter-no

Scan the picking/shipping label of a carton for which you want to record carton information, or enter the carton number and press ENTER.

To select a carton from the remaining cartons in the order, press [F5]. A list of the remaining cartons in the order is displayed. If necessary, press ENTER to display additional screens of cartons, and press the number corresponding to the carton for which you want to record details.

195 1/1Select Carton:1:1000000202:100000021



20. When done, press ENTER. If there are any other cartons in the shipment that you have not recorded, the following message is displayed.

21. Press [F5] to record details for additional cartons in the order, and repeat steps 16 to 19; otherwise, press ENTER and you are returned to the first Record Shipment screen.

22. To record additional shipments, repeat the entire procedure.


CAPTURING ADDITIONAL BARCODES

In some situations, you may need to capture an additional barcode for a carton. Typically, this is necessary when you have manually processed the carton on an external shipping system, and an additional label with a tracking number has been generated for the carton. By capturing this additional barcode, the tracking number can be recorded in WMS and uploaded to the accounting system.

In some cases, you may automatically be prompted to capture the barcode in the Carton Shipping function. If you are not prompted, you can use this procedure to display the barcode prompt.

Unshipped totes found for previous order

Press Enter toignore them orF5 view/select

2 5 9


> To capture an additional barcode:

1. From the Shipping menu, press 5 to select Carton Shipping. You are prompted to select the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons:

2. Press 1 to skip entering a weight. You are prompted to enter the carton you want to process.

3. Press [F6]. You are prompted to scan or enter the additional barcode.

4. Scan the additional barcode. You are returned to the Carton prompt.



CARTON SHIPPINGBarcode:



5. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton with which you want to associate the barcode, or enter the carton number, and press ENTER. A message appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating that the carton has been processed.

6. To process additional cartons, repeat steps 2 to 5.


ADDING CARTONS TO PALLETS

While Sage Accpac WMS does not actually ship cartons by pallet, your host system may often reference finished orders by pallet number, and certain large retailers will only accept orders shipped by pallet. In these contexts, you can use the Add to Pallet function to add or associate cartons with a ‘pallet’, whether the pallet is an actual physical pallet, or simply a virtual entity that you designate by a pallet number.

When you add cartons to a pallet, you can print a new pallet label, if it was not already printed in picking or packing. Pallet labels print the same information as regular picking/shipping labels, but the track-trace number uses a “1” or “2” digit to indicate the type of shipment, rather than the default “0” used for a carton.


100000056 SCANNED

SHIP

2 6 1


> To add cartons to a pallet:

1. From the Shipping menu, press 6 to select Add To Pallet. You are prompted to scan the carton you want to add to a pallet.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The customer track-trace number for the carton is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the pallet with which you want to associate this carton.

ASSIGN TO PALLETCarton:

ASSIGN TO PALLETSweet Thoughts000384635810000000161

Pallet:




4. When prompted to select a label, do one of the following:

• To print a customer-specific pallet label for a shipment addressed to a single store, press [F4].

• To print a customer-specific pallet label for a shipment addressed to multiple stores, press [F5].

• To print a customer-specific pallet label for a shipment consisting of a large quantity of the same product, press [F6].

The label is printed, and you are returned to the Assign to Pallet Screen.

5. Collect your pallet label.

If you already have a pallet label, scan its barcode, or enter the pallet ‘carton’ number (that is, the 1000... number), and press ENTER. A message appears, indicating that the carton has been assigned to the selected pallet.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each carton you want to add to a pallet.

If you do not yet have a pallet label, press [F7] and continue to step 4.


* ASSIGNED *

# Labels:199

-or-F4- Store PalletF5- Mixed PalletF6- Truckload

2 6 3


6. At the Pallet prompt, scan the barcode of the label you just printed, or enter the pallet ‘carton’ number (that is, the 1000... number), and press ENTER. A message appears, indicating that the carton has been assigned to the selected pallet.

7. To assign additional cartons to pallets, repeat steps 2 to 6.


MARKING EXTERNAL PROCESSES COMPLETE

An order may be configured by an end-of-line process to require that an external process be executed before the order can be shipped. The external process may be an automated function, such as another program that needs to perform a task before WMS uploads the pick confirmation; or a manual function, such as a quality assurance inspection, that must be performed before the order leaves the building. If an automated external process is required, that process may automatically inform WMS when it is done and mark the order as ready to upload. If the process is a manual one, or does not automatically update the order status, you must use the Mark External function to do so.


* ASSIGNED *



> To mark an order as having completed an external process:

1. From the Shipping menu, press ENTER to view the second screen of functions, and press 1 to select Mark External. You are prompted to enter any carton in the order that has completed an external process.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number, or order number, and press ENTER. A message appears confirming that the order has been marked, and is now ready to be uploaded.

3. To mark additional orders as having completed an external process, repeat step 2.


MARK EXTERNAL

Carton:

Scan cartonlabel or enterpacking slip #

MARK EXTERNAL

Carton:

Scan cartonlabel or enterpacking slip #* Marked!! *

2 6 5


9 PRINTING LABELS

UNDERSTANDING LABEL PRINTING

Many handheld functions allow you to print different types of labels that are relevant to the specific function you are performing. In many cases, you are even prompted to select the number of labels to print, at the appropriate points of the process. Furthermore, your system may be configured to print many different types of labels automatically in the background, without your having to request them. An exhaustive list of all the types of labels that WMS can print, and when they are normally printed, is provided in “Label and Document Printing” in the manual Overview of Sage Accpac WMS.

However, several independent printing functions are available that allow you to print labels at any time during the warehouse process cycle. These functions print the following:

• Bin labels — see “Printing Bin Labels” on page 272.

• Product labels — see “Printing Product Labels” on page 276.

• License Plates — see “Printing License Plates” on page 287.

• ASN (SSCC-18 format) labels on in-bound cartons — see “Reprinting ASN SSCC-18 Format Labels” on page 288.

• Generic or carrier-specific picking/shipping (SSCC-18) labels — see “Reprinting Picking/Shipping Labels” on page 289.

• Crystal Reports (paper) packslips — see “Reprinting Paper Packslips” on page 291.

• Shipping carton labels — see “Printing Shipping Carton Labels” on page 292.

• Shipping pallet labels — see “Printing Placard Labels” on page 296.

VPCD

2 6 7


UNDERSTANDING PRINTER ASSIGNMENTS

In your Sage Accpac WMS configuration, label printers are numbered from 1 to 24; laser printers are numbered from 1 to 20. However, the physical printers on which labels and paper documents are printed are determined by Sage Accpac WMS logical printers. The following table lists WMS’s logical printers and indicates the labels that each printer handles.

Logical Printer Labels Printed

Bin labels Bin labels

License plates

Product/UPC Product/UPC labels

Price tickets

Replenishment Letdown tickets

Receiving Overstock labels

SCC-14 labels

Putaway labels

Baggie labels

ASN SSCC-18 (reprint only)

Packing All Crystal Reports or other document files, including Crystal pick tickets, paper packslips, pallet placard labels, bills of lading, and manifests.

2 6 8 C H A P T E R 9 P R I N T I N G L A B E L S


The logical printers are assigned to default physical printers globally by your system configuration. In addition, the global settings may also be overridden by user IDs; that is, your user ID may be configured to specify different mappings for logical printers, and every time you log on to Sage Accpac WMS, your user ID settings determines the physical printer to which print jobs are sent.

Picking Assembly labels

Picking/shipping labels

Carrier-compliant picking/shipping labels

Customer-compliant picking/shipping labels

Pallet labels

Batch pick labels

Pre-packslip labels

Packing planner labels

Pick tickets

Baggie labels

Shipping Packslip labels

Carton contents labels

Numbered (N/M) contents labels

Carton summary labels

Order placard labels

RMA labels

Picking/shipping labels (reprint only)

Carrier-compliant picking/shipping labels (reprint only)

Logical Printer Labels Printed

2 6 9


However, you can also change the physical printers on which the labels or files are to be printed, on-the-fly, from the handheld. If you are in a different area of the warehouse, and not near the printer from which you usually collect print jobs, you can use the Print Redirect function to redirect logical printers to the physical printer you want. You can redirect printers for labels that are printed automatically, as well as labels that you request yourself. For more information on this function, see “Redirecting Printers” on page 270.

ABOUT THE PRINT LABELS MENU

Many of the functions discussed in this chapter are accessed through the Print Labels menu. Some label printing function are available on menus were the functions are most commonly performed.

> To access the Print Labels menu:

From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Label Printing and press ENTER. The Print Labels menu is displayed.

REDIRECTING PRINTERS

If you move around the warehouse, and need to reassign the default logical printers, you can do so from the handheld Print Redirect function, provided that you know the number assigned in the system configuration to the physical printer to which you want to redirect print jobs. Label printers are numbered from 1 to 24; laser printers are numbered from 1 to 20. If you do not know the number of the physical printer you want, check with your system administrator.

Print Labels 1/21-Print Redirect2-Content Label3-N/M Contents4-Placard Labels5-Bin Labels6-License Plates7-Overstock Lbls

Print Labels 2/21- - Entire Orders2- - By Bin3-Product Lbls4- - Entire Orders5-SCC-14 Labels6-Summary Label7-Carton Label



When you redirect jobs to another printer, your changes override the defaults for this session (or until you redirect them again). After you log off, the printer assignments are reset to their defaults.

> To redirect a printer:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press the number corresponding to Print Redirect. The Printer Redirect menu is displayed, with the current settings.

2. Press the number corresponding to the printer from which you want to redirect printing jobs. If you are not sure which printer you need to reassign, consult the table in “Understanding Printer Assignments” on page 268, which lists the types of labels that each printer normally prints.

You are prompted to enter the number of the printer to which you want to redirect jobs.

PRINTER REDIRECT1-Picking: DFLT2-Receiving: DFLT3-Shipping: DFLT4-Packing: DFLT5-Bin Labels: DFLT6-Product/UPC: DFLTRedirect (1-6):

PRINTER REDIRECT

1-Picking: DFLT

Redirect to:

2 7 1


3. Enter the number of the physical printer to which you want to redirect jobs and press ENTER. If you are not sure of the physical printer number you need, consult your system administrator.

The Printer Redirect menu is re-displayed, with the number you specified for the selected logical printer. All label printing jobs for that logical printer are now printed on the physical printer you specified, until you log off the system, or until you redirect that logical printer again.

4. To redirect additional logical printers, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Print Labels menu.

PRINTING BIN LABELS

While all your bins will be labelled when Sage Accpac WMS is first installed in your warehouse, you may need to print new bin labels when adding new bins to your warehouse or replacing damaged or faded bin labels. You print bin labels for a specified range of bins.

Bin labels often have a dash (—) separating the letters and numbers of the identifier on the printed label so that it is easier to read bin numbers quickly.

PRINTER REDIRECT1-Picking: #32-Receiving :DFLT3-Shipping: DFLT4-Packing: DFLT5-Bin Labels: DFLT6-Product/UPC DFLTRedirect (1-6):



> To print bin labels:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Bin Labels. The Bin Labels menu is displayed. .

2. Optionally, to print bin labels with a dash (—) separating numbers in the bin location, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Dash in Text before selecting the dimensions of your bin labels. You are prompted to enter the position of the dash on the label.

Enter a number that corresponds to the position of the dash character in your bin number. For example, if your bin location is 68-455614, the position of the dash character in your bin location is 3 (the dash is the third character in your bin number).

BIN LABELS 1/21-2 x 1/22-2 x 3/43-2 1/2 x 14-3 1/2 x 25-4 x 26-4 x 6

BIN LABELS 2/21-Custom Labels2-Dash in Text

BIN LABELS

Dash Position:

Dash will appearin this positionon the label.

2 7 3


3. From the Bin Labels menu, press the number corresponding to the size of the label you want to print. You are prompted to enter the first bin in the range of bins for which you want to print labels.

4. At the First Bin prompt, scan the bin’s existing barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the last bin in the range of bins for which you want to print labels.

BIN LABELS

First Bin>Last Bin

BIN LABELS

First Bin A1Last Bin>



5. At the Last Bin prompt, scan the bin’s existing barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm printing these labels.

Note: The range of bins you enter must be valid, according to the bins defined in your system setup. If you try to enter an invalid range of bins, you will receive an error message. If you are unsure of the bin rules defined in your configuration, consult your system administrator.

6. Press Y to print the listed number of labels; or press N to cancel. You are returned the screen where you can enter a bin range for the label.

7. To print labels for additional ranges of bins, repeat steps 4 to 6.

8. To print bin labels in a different size or format, press ENTER to return to the Bin Labels menu and repeat steps 2 to 6.

9. To exit the bin label printing function, press ENTER then press [F1]. You are returned to the Print Labels menu.

BIN LABELS

You asked for 4 Labels.

Proceed Yes/No ?

2 7 5


PRINTING PRODUCT LABELS

You can print three types of product labels:

• Product/UPC labels — These are typically small labels which are attached to every unit of a product. They show the product number, UPC, and product description, and contain a unique identifier barcode (often the product number or UPC). To print product/UPC labels, follow any of the procedures in “Printing Product (Unit) Labels” on page 276.

• Overstock labels — These are larger labels which are attached to a bulk container, such as a case, of multiple units. They show the product number, product description, and the number of units inside the case, and contain a barcode often representing the product number and the quantity. To print overstock labels, follow any of the procedures in “Printing Overstock (Case) Labels” on page 280.

• SCC-14 labels — These are industry-standard labels with an SCC-14 barcode to identify the product. To print SCC-14 labels, follow the procedure in “Printing SCC-14 Barcode Labels” on page 285.

PRINTING PRODUCT (UNIT) LABELS

You can print product unit labels using the following methods:

• By product. This method prints a label for a single product. Follow the procedure in “Printing Product (Unit) Labels for a Product” on page 277.

• By sales order. This method prints a label for all products in a sales order. Follow the procedure in “Printing Product (Unit) Labels For an Entire Sales Order” on page 279.



PRINTING PRODUCT (UNIT) LABELS FOR A PRODUCT

Printing product labels by product generates any number of labels for a single product. Note that you can also access this function from Receiving, Pull Kitting, and Finish Kits functions.

> To print product labels by product:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Product Lbls. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to print product labels.

2. Scan the product’s existing barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


If your system is configured to disallow consolidation of inventory for different POs, expiry dates, or received dates, you are prompted to enter the bin in which the product is currently stored.

PRODUCT LBLS

Product:>

PRODUCT LBLS

Product:LF551Breathsavers Spearmi Bin:

2 7 7


3. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER to leave the bin field blank. You are prompted to enter a customer SKU for this product.

4. If you want to print the customer’s product number on this label, enter the number and press ENTER; otherwise, press ENTER to leave this field blank. If you are prompted to enter a packsize and/or a number of packs (for packaged/bagged goods), enter the desired values at the prompts and press ENTER each time. Otherwise, a default of 1 is displayed for each value, and you are prompted to enter the number of labels you need to print for this product.

5. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of product labels you want, and press ENTER. The labels are printed, and you are returned to the Print Labels menu.

6. To print product labels for additional products, repeat steps 1 to 5.

7. To exit label printing functions, press [F1]. You are returned to the main menu.

PRODUCT LBLSProduct:? >LF551Breathsavers SpearmiSKU#:

PRODUCT LBLSProduct:? >LF551Breathsavers SpearmiSKU#:Pack Qty: 25# Packs: 1#Labels:



PRINTING PRODUCT (UNIT) LABELS FOR AN ENTIRE SALES ORDER

Printing product labels by order generates one label for each line in a sales order, one label for each unit in an order, one label for each pack in an order, or one label for each pack in a carton of a completely picked order.

> To print product labels by order:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Product Lbls - Entire Order. You are prompted to enter order number for which you want to print product labels.

2. Enter the order number and press ENTER. You are prompted to select the method by which you want to print product labels for this order.

PRODUCT LBLS

Order Number:

PRODUCT LBLS

Order Number:1951- Label/Line2- Label/Item3- Label/Pack4- Label/Carton

2 7 9


3. Press the number corresponding to the option you want:

Your product labels are printed and you are returned to the Order Number prompt.

4. To print product labels for additional orders, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. To exit the Product Label for an Entire Order printing function, press ENTER. Then press [F1] to return to the main menu.

PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS

You can print overstock labels using the following methods:

• By product. This method prints a label for a single product. Follow the procedure in “Printing Overstock (Case) Labels for a Product” below.

• By sales order. This method prints a label for all products in a sales order. Follow the procedure in “Printing Overstock (Case) Labels for an Entire Sales Order” on page 282.

• By bin. This method prints a label for all products in a bin. Follow the procedure in “Printing Overstock (Case) Labels for a Bin” on page 284.

Option Prints...

1 1 label for each line in the order.

2 1 label for each unit in the order (based on the first size or unit default).

3 1 label for each pack in the order.

4 1 label for each pack in a carton (can only be printed for a fully picked order).



PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS FOR A PRODUCT

Printing overstock labels by product generates any number of labels for a caseload of a single product.

> To print overstock labels by product:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Overstock Lbls. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to print overstock labels.

2. Scan the product’s existing barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


You are prompted to enter the packsize for which you want to print overstock labels.

OVERSTOCK LBLS

Product:>

OVERSTOCK LBLS

Product:>LF211Spearmint GumQ per Label:(Default 1)

2 8 1


3. At the Q per Label prompt, enter the packsize for the case you want to label and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the number of labels you want to print.

4. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of overstock labels you want to print and press ENTER. Your labels are printed, and you are returned to the product selection prompt.

5. To print overstock labels for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.

6. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Print Labels menu. Press [F1] to return to the main menu.

PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS FOR AN ENTIRE SALES ORDER

Printing overstock labels by order generates one label for each line in a sales order, one label for each unit in an order, or one label for each pack in a carton of a completely picked order.

> To print overstock labels by order:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Overstock Lbls - Entire Order. You are prompted to enter the sales order number for which you want to print overstock labels.

OVERSTOCK LBLS

Product:>LF211Spearmint GumQ per Label:12#Labels:

OVERSTOCK

Order Number:



2. Enter the order number and press ENTER. You are prompted to select the method by which you want to print overstock labels for this order.


Your overstock labels are printed and you are returned to the Order Number prompt.

4. To print overstock labels for additional orders, repeat steps 2 and 3.


OVERSTOCK

Order Number:1951- Label/Line2- Label/Item3- Label/Carton

Option Prints...

1 1 label for each line in the order.

2 1 label for each unit in the order (based on the first size or unit default).

3 1 label for each pack in a carton (can only be printed for a fully picked order).

2 8 3


PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS FOR A BIN

Printing overstock labels by bin generates one label for each product in a bin or one label for each unit in a bin.

> To print overstock labels by bin:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Overstock Lbls - By Bin. You are prompted to enter the bin for which you want to print overstock labels.

2. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number, and press ENTER. You are prompted to select the method by which you want to print overstock labels for this bin.

OVERSTOCK Bin:

OVERSTOCK

Bin: BULK1

1 – Each Product2 – Each Unit




Your overstock labels are printed and you are returned to the bin selection prompt.

4. To print overstock labels for additional bins, repeat steps 2 and 3.


PRINTING SCC-14 BARCODE LABELS

Before you can print SCC-14 labels, barcode references must exist in the Sage Accpac WMS database for the products for which you want to print these labels. You can create barcode references from the handheld if you have permission; for information, see “Setting, Modifying, or Deleting Product Cross-References” on page 360.

> To print SCC-14 labels:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to SCC 14 Labels. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to print SCC-14 labels.

Option Prints...

1 1 label for each different product in the bin. For example, if there are two different products in the bin, 2 labels will be printed.

2 1 label for each unit of all products in the bin. For example, if there are 2 products, each with 2 cartons of 2500 units, 10,000 labels will be printed.

SCC 14 LABELS

Product:

2 8 5


2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to select the packsize for which you want to print the labels.

3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of packsizes, press the number corresponding to the desired packsize and press ENTER. The SCC-14 number is displayed, and you are prompted for the number of labels you want to print.

4. At the #Labels prompt, enter the desired number of labels, and press ENTER. The labels are printed, and you are returned to the product selection prompt.

5. To print SCC-14 labels for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.


LF311 1/1SCC 14:Product:1: 25-Juicy Fruit2: 100-Juicy Fruit

SCC 14 LABELS 100-Juicy FruitSCC 14:442295.00#Labels:



PRINTING LICENSE PLATES

When you create a new license plate in the warehouse, you can usually scan a carton label or track-trace number and use that as the license plate. However, if you are creating new license plate numbers, you can use the license plate print function to print a label for the next sequential licence plate number (for example L00000026, L00000027, L00000028). Then when you license plate products in the warehouse, you can scan the license plate label you printed. See “Creating License Plates” on page 383.

Note: There is no license plate reprint function. The license plate print function prints a new license plate each time it prints a license plate label.

> To print license plates:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to License Plates. You are prompted to enter the number of license plates you want to print.

2. Enter the number of unique license plates to print. For example entering 2 will print the next unused license plate number and the number after that.

When you enter the number of labels, your licence plates are printed and you are returned to the Print Labels menu.

3. Press [F1] to return to the main menu.

PRINT LICENSE PLATES

# LAbels:

2 8 7


REPRINTING ASN SSCC-18 FORMAT LABELS

ASN receiving requires SSCC-18 shipping labels created by your suppliers using the Sage Accpac WMS Vendor Portal. During the receiving process in the warehouse, you can optionally reprint the ASN carton labels (in SSCC-18 format labels) that were originally created by suppliers using Vendor Portal. This may be necessary, for example, if the original label was damaged.

> To reprint the ASN (SSC-18 format) track-trace labels:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER. The Receiving menu is displayed.

2. From the Receiving menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to RePrint SSCC18-ASN. You are prompted to enter the carton for which you want to reprint the ASN SSCC-18 label.

3. At the Totlabel # prompt, scan the existing ASN SSCC-18 label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. Your label is printed.

4. To reprint ASN SSCC-18 labels for additional cartons, repeat step 3.

5. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Receiving menu.

VPCD

REPRINT SSCC_18-ASN

TotLabel #:



REPRINTING PICKING/SHIPPING LABELS

You can reprint picking/shipping labels after you have begun picking an order, by using the Reprint SSCC-18 function in the Repack menu. This function prints a generic or carrier-specific label.

Note: You should only use this function to replace an existing label if it was damaged. To print additional labels for new shipping cartons, use the [F7] function available from Picking, Repacking, and Add to Pallet functions.

> To print an additional picking/shipping label:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick + Pack and press ENTER. The Picking menu is displayed.

2. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to Repack. The Repack menu displays.

3. From the Repack menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to RePrint SSCC18. You are prompted to enter the carton for which you want to reprint a picking/shipping label.

REPRINT SSCC-18-SHIP

TotLabel #:

2 8 9


4. At the TotLabel # prompt, scan the existing picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER.

5. At the # Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want to print for this carton and press ENTER. Your label(s) is printed and a message displays.

6. To reprint picking/shipping labels for additional cartons, repeat steps 4-5.



# Labels:


TotLabel #:

Label Printed!



REPRINTING PAPER PACKSLIPS

Crystal Reports packslips are typically printed automatically after orders have been picked, if your warehouse uses them. However, you can manually reprint a paper packslip generated by Crystal Reports with the Reprint Packslip function.

> To reprint a paper packslip:

1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Shipping. The Shipping menu is displayed.

2. Press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Reprint Packslip. You are prompted to choose a the type of packslip to print.

3. Type the number corresponding to the packslip you want to print and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the carton/order for which you want to reprint a packslip.

4. Scan the picking/shipping label of any carton in the order, or enter the carton number or order number and press ENTER. The packslip is printed.

5. To reprint packslips for additional orders, repeat step 4.


REPRINT PACKSLIP1- Paper Packslip2- Label Packslip

REPRINT PACKSLIPCarton:

Scan carton label or enter packing slip #

2 9 1


PRINTING SHIPPING CARTON LABELS

Shipping carton labels are typically printed automatically after orders have been picked. However, you can also use the handheld to generate additional labels. The following types of labels are available:

• Carton contents label

This type of label is associated with a specific carton, and lists the shipping serial number of the carton, and all the products contained in it. Use this type of label when you are handling orders containing a single carton; you only need to label one of the cartons; or you do not need to indicate the number of cartons in the order. Follow the procedure in “Printing Single Carton Contents Labels” on page 293.

• Numbered (N/M) carton contents label

This type of label is associated with a specific carton, lists the serial number of the carton and all the products contained in it, and is automatically numbered for each carton in an order. (For example, the numbered content label of the third carton in an order of five cartons would be numbered 3/5.) Use this type of label for orders containing multiple cartons when you need to label all the cartons and you need to indicate the total number of cartons in the order. Follow the procedure in “Printing Numbered Carton Contents Labels” on page 294.

• Carton summary label

This type of label lists the order number, and the total number of cartons, lines and units in the order. One label is printed for each order. Follow the procedure in “Printing Summary Labels” on page 295.



PRINTING SINGLE CARTON CONTENTS LABELS

This procedure prints one label for a single carton in an order.

> To generate a single carton contents label:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Content Label. You are prompted to enter the number of the carton for which you want to print a label.

2. Scan the carton’s picking/shipping label, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The label is printed, and the order, number of lines and units in the carton are displayed.

3. To print contents labels for additional cartons, repeat step 2.


CONTENT LABEL

Carton:

CONTENT LABEL

Carton:

Order: 196Lines: 2Units: 500 Label Printed

2 9 3


PRINTING NUMBERED CARTON CONTENTS LABELS

This procedure prints numbered content labels for every carton in an order.

> To generate numbered contents labels:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to N/M Contents. You are prompted to enter a carton in the order for which you want to print numbered contents labels.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of any carton in the order, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. A label is printed for every carton in the order, and the order, number of lines and units in the entire order are displayed.

3. To print numbered contents labels for additional orders, repeat step 2.


N/M CONTENTS

Carton:

N/M CONTENTSCarton:

Order: 196Lines: 2Units: 500Cartn: 1 Label Printed



PRINTING SUMMARY LABELS

This procedure prints one label per order.

> To generate summary labels:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Summary Label. You are prompted to enter a carton in the order for which you want to print a summary label.

2. Scan the picking/shipping label of any carton in the order, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. A summary of the cartons, lines, and units in the order is displayed, and the label is printed.

3. To print summary labels for additional orders, repeat step 2.


CARTON SUMMARY

Carton:

CARTON SUMMARY

Carton:

Order: 197Lines: 2Units: 500Cartn: 1

2 9 5


PRINTING PLACARD LABELS

Order placard labels number each pallet in an order, with shipping and packslip information. For example, the placard label of the third pallet in an order of five pallets would be numbered 3/5. However, the label is not associated with any specific pallet. You can use this type of label when you want to identify all of the pallets in an order, but want to choose how the pallets are to be numbered.

To create order placard labels, you must have already generated pallet labels for an order.

> To print order placard labels:

1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Placard Labels. You are prompted to enter the order number for which you want to print placard labels.

2. Scan a picking/shipping label for one of the pallets in the order, or enter the order number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the total number of pallets in the order.

PLACARD LABELS

Order#:

PLACARD LABELS100000009# Pallets:



3. Enter the number of pallets in the order and press ENTER. Placard labels are printed for each pallet, for the number of pallets you specified.

4. To print placard labels for additional orders, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Print Labels menu.

2 9 7


10 COUNTING INVENTORY

UNDERSTANDING INVENTORY COUNTING FUNCTIONS

Once your warehouse is in production, discrepancies between the inventory reported by the system and the actual inventory stored in the warehouse can occur because of unreported damage to products, unrecorded changes in the system, theft of product, or procedural errors. For this reason, you need to physically verify inventory on a cyclical basis.

You can perform two types of counts:

• Cycle counting

Cycle counting is a regular, routine procedure which you use to count a limited amount of stock. Cycle counting can be performed at any time, concurrently with all other warehouse operations. You can also use cycle counting to add or remove stock from bins, if your warehouse does not use miscellaneous adjustments. To perform a cycle count, follow any of the procedures in “Performing a Cycle Count” on page 301.

• Full stock counting

Full stock counting is a wall-to-wall count of the entire inventory in the warehouse. Your company may perform a full stock count once when you first set up Sage Accpac WMS, or on a regular interval, such as annually. Full stock counting requires that the entire system be shut down, and is therefore usually only performed outside of regular warehouse operations. Stock counting with the RF handhelds is performed in conjunction with the Inventory Count Wizard, which is run by a manager in RFBase. To perform a full stock first count or recount, follow the procedures provided in “Performing a Full Stock Count” on page 308.

2 9 9


Note: You cannot use any of the cycle counting functions to add product with a new non-unique attribute number, such as a lot number, that the system does not already recognize. If you need to do so, you will need to use the Receiving or Miscellaneous Adjustments functions.

Regardless of the type of count you wish to perform, the general procedure for counting inventory is as follows:

1. Identify the type of count you want to perform. To perform a cycle count, select any of the methods described in “Performing a Cycle Count” on page 301. To perform a full stock first count or recount, select the appropriate option described in “Performing a Full Stock Count” on page 308.

2. Go to the appropriate bin and count all the products in the bin, by using any of the methods described in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

3. Complete the count in any of the following cases:

• When you have finished counting a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin (these are all bins which can store more than one product).

• When you have performed a cycle count by product, and have found fewer items in the bin than the system expected.

• When you have counted a dedicated bin (this is a bin which can store only one product), and have found fewer items in the bin than the system expected.

Follow the procedure in “Completing a Count” on page 320.

4. Repeat the procedure until you have counted all the bins you need to count.

You can also stop and restart a bin count at any time; for information, see “Stopping and Restarting a Count” on page 322.

ATT

3 0 0 C H A P T E R 1 0 C O U N T I N G I N V E N T O R Y


All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Cycle Count menu.

> To access the Cycle Count menu:

1. From the main menu, if necessary, press ENTER to display the second screen of functions.

2. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Cycle Count. The Cycle Count menu is displayed.

PERFORMING A CYCLE COUNT

You can initiate a cycle count according to the following criteria:

• By bin

This is the most common method of cycle counting. This method allows you to select the first bin to count, and then moves to the next bin according to bin sequence and zone sequence (if you are using multiple zones). You generally use this method to count the same bins over and over again in the same area of your warehouse (for example, those that contain fast moving products), or to allow multiple counters to cycle count in different aisles of the same zones so they do not overlap. Follow the procedure in “Cycle Counting by Bin” on page 302.

CYCLE COUNT

1- By Date2- By Product3- By Bin3- Full Count

3 0 1


• By date

This method counts all the bins in a zone, in the sequence in which they were last counted, from least recent to most recent. You can use this method when you want to count all bins in a zone over cyclical periods. Or you might use this method if only one person is cycle counting and cannot cycle-count an entire area in a single day. If your system supports multiple clients/companies, you can also use this method to count only the products of a specific client. Follow the procedure in “Cycle Counting by Date” on page 304.

• By product

This method counts all the bins containing a specific product. You can use this method when you want to verify quantities and locations of a single product. Follow the procedure in “Cycle Counting by Product” on page 306.

You may also be prompted to count products by A, B, or C class, where these letters designate different groupings of products according to their sales value. In the procedures in this manual, ABC counting is not used.

CYCLE COUNTING BY BIN

When you cycle count by bin, you identify the first bin you want to count. After that, the system directs you to each sequential bin, by zone. You can also skip any bin you don’t want to count.

> To cycle count by bin:

1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 3 to select By Bin. You are prompted to enter the first bin you want to count.

CYCLE COUNTBy BinFirst Bin:>



2. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the First Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, the cycle count begins at the next sequential bin from the bin that you entered.

3. If you want to skip counting this bin, press [F2]. Otherwise, continue by following the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

4. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins you are assigned to count.

5. When you are finished, do any of the following:

• To return to the Cycle Count menu to perform another type of cycle count, press [F1].

• To exit cycle counting, press [F1] twice.

BY BIN C1 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 2/17PRODUCT:

f9-Complete

The date this bin was last counted.

The total number of different products/packsizes expected in this bin.

The total number of packs of all products expected in this bin.

3 0 3


CYCLE COUNTING BY DATE

When you cycle count by date, you count the bins in a specific zone, starting with the bin that was counted last.

If your warehouse supports multiple client/companies, you can also use this method to count only the products that belong to a single client.

> To cycle count by date:

1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 1 to select By Date.


• If you want to count only the products for a specific client, enter the client name/number and press ENTER.

• If you want to count the products for all clients, simply press ENTER.

If there are multiple zones defined for your warehouse, you are prompted to enter the zone you want to count. At the Zone prompt, enter the zone.

You are directed to the bin (in the zone you selected) that has not been counted for the longest period of time.

2. Go to the bin, and continue by following the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

3PL

3PL

ZONE

BY DATE C1 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 2/17PRODUCT:

f9-Complete






3. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins to which you are directed. When you have counted all the bins, a message is displayed (if your warehouse uses multiple zones, the zone that you selected in step 1 is displayed).

4. Press ENTER to return to the first cycle count by date screen.


• If you are using multiple zones, and want to count by date in more zones, repeat this procedure.



CYCLE COUNT DateBins alreadycounted today

Enter - Continue

ZONE

3 0 5


CYCLE COUNTING BY PRODUCT

When you count by product, you are directed to every bin containing that product, by bin sequence and zone sequence (if your warehouse uses multiple zones). You are only required to count the product you have selected, regardless of other products that are stored in a bin. You can also skip any bin you don’t want to count.

> To cycle count by product:

1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 2 to select By Product. You are prompted to identify the product you want to count.

2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product, and press ENTER.


You are directed to the first sequential bin containing the product.

CYCLE COUNTBy Product>

BY PRODUCT C1 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 1/10PRODUCT:

f9-Complete


The total number of different packsizes expected in this bin.

The total number of packs of this product expected in this bin.



3. If you want to skip counting this bin, press [F2]. Otherwise, go to the bin and continue by following the procedures for counting a bin in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

4. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins to which you are directed. When you have counted all the bins, a message is displayed.

5. Press ENTER to return to the first cycle count by product screen.


• To count more products, repeat this procedure.



CYCLE COUNT PRODUCTNo bins leftfor productLF311

Enter - Continue

3 0 7


PERFORMING A FULL STOCK COUNT

Full stock counting involves the following steps:

• First count

This step is always performed. In the first count, you select each bin you want to count. Some warehouses perform two first counts before doing a recount. Follow the procedure in “Performing a Full Stock Count” on page 308.

• Recount

This step is performed if inventory discrepancies are serious enough to warrant recounting particular bins. In a recount, you are directed by the system to count only those bins that showed the discrepancies, in their bin sequence. Follow the procedure in “Performing a Recount” on page 311.

Note: You should not begin a full first count or recount until the Inventory Count Wizard has been run in the Sage Accpac Console. For more information, see your warehouse supervisor.



PERFORMING THE FIRST COUNT

When you perform the first count, you select each bin you want to count.

> To perform a full count:

1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 4 to select Full Count. The Full Count menu is displayed.

2. From the Full Count menu, press 1 to select First Count.


• If you want to count only the products for a specific client, enter the client name/number and press ENTER.

• If you want to count the products for all clients, simply press ENTER.

You are prompted to enter the first bin you want to count.

FULL COUNT1- First Count2- Recount

FULL COUNTFull CountBIN:>

3PL

3 0 9


3. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the First Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, the cycle count begins at the next sequential bin from the bin that you entered.

4. Continue by following the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313. When you have counted a bin, you are prompted to identify the next bin you want to count.

5. Repeat the procedure until you have counted all the bins you are assigned to count.

6. When you are finished, press [F1] twice to exit the count function.

FC 1ST C1 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 2/17PRODUCT:

f9-Complete






PERFORMING A RECOUNT

When you perform a recount, you identify the first bin from which you would like to begin counting. You are directed to each bin that was found to show a discrepancy between the initial/book count and the current inventory that exceeded the specified variance, in bin and zone sequence.

> To perform a recount:

1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 4 to select Full Count. The Full Count menu is displayed.

2. From the Full Count menu, press 2 to select Recount. You are prompted to enter the first bin you want to count.

FULL COUNT1- First Count2- Recount

FULL COUNTRecountFirst Bin:>

3 1 1


3. At the First Bin prompt, scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are directed to the first bin that has been marked for recounting.

4. Go to the bin, and continue by following the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

5. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins to which you are directed.When you have counted all the bins marked for recounting, a message is displayed.

6. Press ENTER to return to the first recount screen.

7. To exit the count function, press [F1] twice.

FULL COUNT RecountThere are nomore binspast: WORK4

Enter - Continue

FC RECOUNT A1 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 1/6PRODUCT:

f9-CompleteThe total number of different products/packsizes expected in this bin.


The date of the first full count.



COUNTING PRODUCTS IN A BIN

Once you have selected the method of counting bins, you also have two modes of counting the products stored in those bins:

• By quantity — This is the default mode, in which you scan or enter a product once, count the packs, and enter the quantity you counted. Steps for counting by quantity are provided in “Counting by Quantity” on page 314.

• By each — In this mode, you are never prompted to enter a count. Instead, you scan or enter each pack of a product, and the quantity is increased by one for each scan. This method is useful when units of the same product are not grouped together in the bin and it is easier to count each product individually rather than trying to count a set of items at the same time and then entering a quantity. Steps for counting by quantity are provided in “Counting by Each” on page 317.

You can toggle back and forth between Count by Quantity and Count by Each modes by pressing [F5].

In addition, if you have the appropriate permission, you can display a list of expected products for each bin, from which you can view (and select) the products to count, as well as toggling between Count by Quantity and Count by Each modes. This may be useful when you want to see what additional products the system expects, when you believe you have finished counting a bin.

You can also interrupt and restart a count at any time. You will need to do so if multiple counters are counting the same bin. For procedures, see “Stopping and Restarting a Count” on page 322.

Note: For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose restrictions on the products you can count into bins. For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot count a product into a pick bin if it is already stored in another one.

3 1 3


COUNTING BY QUANTITY

Count By Quantity is the default mode, in which you only need to scan one product once, count the number of packs, and enter your count.

> To count products by quantity:



At the PRODUCT prompt, scan the barcode label of the first product you want to count, or enter the product number and press ENTER.

At the PRODUCT prompt, press [F4] to display a list of expected products. The products and expected quantities and packsizes are displayed.

Press ENTER to view additional screens of products, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to the product and packsize you want to count first.

C3 1/1Select Prod:1:LF311 3*100 2:LF522 7*25 3:LF600 2*100



If the system expects to find the product there, and the product is only stored in one packsize, the product and expected packsize are displayed, and you are prompted to count the product. Continue by following step 2.

If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, or if the product is stored in the bin in more than one packsize, you are prompted to select a packsize for the product you entered.

At the Packsize prompt, enter the packsize of the product in the bin, and press ENTER.

2. Count the number of packs, and at the Quantity prompt, enter the quantity you counted and press ENTER.

Note: You do not have to enter the total quantity at once. If you count the product multiple times for the bin, each quantity is added to the previously counted quantity.

If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, the message Not Expected! is displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add the product to the bin. Press Y to add the product or N to cancel.

C1 Expected: 2/17LF211Spearmint Gum

Packsize:25Quantity:

C1 Expected: 2/17LF408Tic Tac Freshmint

Packsize:(Default:2500)

3 1 5


If you counted more units of a product/packsize than the system expected to find in the bin, the message Too Many! appears, with the surplus quantity reported, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add the full total to the bin. Press Y to add the items or N to cancel.

If you are counting by product and it is only stored in one packsize in the bin, or if the bin you counted is a dedicated bin, and you did not count less than the system expected, you are automatically directed to the next bin to count. Repeat any of the counting procedures to count the bin.

If you are counting by product and it is only stored in one packsize in the bin, or if the bin you counted is a dedicated bin (that is, a bin that can only contain one product), and you have counted fewer items than the system expected, complete the count by following the procedure in “Completing a Count” on page 320.

If you are counting by any other method, and the bin is a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin, you are returned to the product prompt. If you have the appropriate permission, the expected numbers are decreased accordingly. Continue to the next step.

3. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted to add the number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/enter the number again. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are counting in this bin.

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each different product in a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin (unless you are counting by product).

5. When you have finished counting all products in the bin, complete the count by following the procedure in “Completing a Count” on page 320.

ATT



COUNTING BY EACH

In Count By Each mode, you must scan each pack in the bin rather than entering a quantity. Each time you scan or enter an item, the count is automatically is increased by one.

To start Count by Each mode, you press [F5] from the first cycle counting screen; to return to the regular Count By Qty mode, press [F5] again.

> To count products by each:

1. At the PRODUCT prompt, press [F5]. You are switched to counting by each mode.


C2 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 2/12PRODUCT(Each):

f9-Complete

At the PRODUCT prompt, scan the barcode label of the first product you want to count, or enter the product number and press ENTER.

At the PRODUCT prompt, press [F4] to display a list of expected products. The products and expected quantities and packsizes are displayed.

Press ENTER to view additional screens of products, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to the product and packsize you want to count first.

C3 1/1Select Prod:1:LF311 3*100 2:LF522 7*25 3:LF600 2*100

3 1 7



If the system expects to find the product there, and the product is only stored in one packsize, the system automatically counts 1 pack of the product. If you have the appropriate permission, the expected numbers are decreased accordingly. Continue by following step 4.

3. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the product’s barcode label or enter the number and press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted to add the number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/enter the number again. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are counting in this bin.

If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, or if the product is stored in the bin in more than one packsize, you are prompted to select a packsize for the product you entered.

At the Packsize prompt, enter the packsize of the product in the bin, and press ENTER.

If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, the message Not Expected! is displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add the product to the bin. Press Y to add the product or N to cancel.

C2 Last: 07/24/2003Expected: 2/12LF522Big Red

Packsize:(Default:2500)

ATT



4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have counted all remaining packs of this product.

If you counted more than the system expected to find in the bin, the message Too Many! appears, with the surplus quantity reported, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add the full total to the bin. Press Y to add the items or N to cancel.

If you are counting by product and it is only stored in one packsize in the bin, or if the bin you counted is a dedicated bin, and you did not count less than the system expected, you are automatically directed to the next bin to count. Repeat any of the counting procedures to count the bin.

If you are counting by product and it is only stored in one packsize in the bin, or if the bin you counted is a dedicated bin, and you have counted fewer items than the system expected, complete the count by following the procedure in “Completing a Count” on page 320.

If you are counting by any other method, and the bin is a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin, you are returned to the product prompt. If you have the appropriate permission, the expected numbers are decreased accordingly. Continue to the next step.

5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each different product in a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin (unless you are counting by product).

6. When you have finished counting all products in the bin, complete the count by following the procedure in “Completing a Count” on page 320.

3 1 9


COMPLETING A COUNT

You need to complete a count in any of the following instances:

• When you have finished counting a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin (these are bins which can store multiple products).

• When you have finished counting the product in a dedicated bin (this is a bin which can only store a single product), and the quantity you found in the bin is less than what the system expected.

• When you have finished a cycle count by product, and the quantity you found in the bin is less than what the system expected.

Note: If you are among several people counting the same bin, and you are not the last counter, you should not complete the count, but stop it; for procedures, see “Stopping a Count” on page 322.

> To complete a count:

1. After finishing counting the product(s) in the bin, press [F9]. If your count matches, or is greater than, the count the system expects, you are directed to the next bin to count. If you counted less than the quantity expected by the system for any product, you are prompted to confirm that the uncounted items are to be deleted.

C2Expected : 2/12You counted less products than expected. OK to delete rest?(Y/N)




3. Continue by doing any of the following:

• To count the next bin, follow any of the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

• If you are performing a full stock first count, identify the next bin to count, and follow any of the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.

• If you are cycle counting by bin or product, and want to skip the bin, press [F2].

• To quit counting, press [F1] to return to the main Cycle Count menu.

If you are confident in your count and want to remove the extra products, press Y. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

Press Y. If you are performing a first full count, you will be prompted to identify the next bin to count; otherwise you will be directed to the next bin.

If you want to recount the products in this bin, press N. You are prompted to cancel the count for this bin.

Press N. You are returned to the first screen. To recount the bin, repeat any of the procedures for counting a bin.

If you want to cancel the count for this bin and skip to the next bin, press N. You are prompted to cancel the count for this bin.

Press Y. If you are performing a first full count, you will be prompted to identify the next bin to count; otherwise you will be directed to the next bin.

C2Uncounted: 2/12

Are you sure youwant to deleteany uncounted products?(Y/N)

C2

Is it OK to quit countingthis bin?(Y/N)

C2

Is it OK to quit countingthis bin?(Y/N)

3 2 1


STOPPING AND RESTARTING A COUNT

You can stop a bin count at any time. You can also restart your own or someone else’s bin count. Since several people can count the same non-dedicated, random or carton bin at the same time (but not the same products), all counters except the last should stop the count, and not complete it. When the last count is done, that counter can then complete the count, as described in “Completing a Count” on page 320

To stop a count, see the procedure in “Stopping a Count” on page 322. To restart a non-completed count, see the procedure in “Restarting a Count” on page 323.

STOPPING A COUNT

When you stop a count, you have the choice of cancelling the counts you performed so far, or of saving them for the person who will resume the count.

> To stop or interrupt a bin count:

1. At any point during a count, press [F1]. If you have not yet counted any product, you are returned to the main Cycle Count menu. If you have already counted some product in the bin, you are prompted to save the counts.

C3Someone’s countwas interrupted.

Reset the countsand count thebin again?(Y/N)




• If you want to give the next counter the option of starting the count over or of resuming where you left off, press N. (This is the recommended option.) The next counter will receive the same message, and can select the appropriate option, as described in “Restarting a Count” on page 323.

• If you want to cancel all counts that you made, and force the next counter to start the count over again, press Y.

You are returned to the main Cycle Count menu.

RESTARTING A COUNT

If you arrive at a bin for which a previous counter interrupted the count but opted to save the counts s/he made so far, you are prompted to restart the count.

C3Someone’s countwas interrupted.

Reset the countsand count thebin again?(Y/N)

3 2 3


> To restart the bin count:


• If you want to keep the counts that the previous counter performed, and count only the remaining products and quantities, press N. (This is the recommended option.) You are prompted to begin counting the products that were not counted during the last count.

• If you want to cancel the counts that the previous counter performed, and start the count over again, press Y. You are prompted to begin counting the first product.

• If you are not sure what to do, and would prefer to skip the bin, press [F1] again. If you are performing a first full count, you will be prompted to identify the next bin to count; otherwise you will be directed to the next bin.

2. Continue by following any of the procedures in “Counting Products in a Bin” on page 313.



11 ADJUSTING INVENTORY

UNDERSTANDING ADJUSTMENTS

You can add stock to or remove stock from the warehouse for reasons other than receiving or picking orders, by using a miscellaneous adjustment. For example, your warehouse might use miscellaneous adjustments to deal with sample products, customer returns, and damaged goods. Your system will be configured to allow certain types of miscellaneous adjustments, which may include any of the following:

Adjustment Code Keeps track of...

Borrowed Stock

BS Removal and subsequent addition of products that are lent or borrowed.

Customer Returns

RC Addition of stock returned by customers.

Damaged Goods

DG Removal of damaged stock.

Destroyed in Field

DF Removal of stock destroyed outside of the warehouse.

Donations DN Removal of stock given away as a donation.

Front Counter FC Removal of stock for front-counter orders. This uploads a miscellaneous adjustment record to the accounting system, rather than the usual picking confirmation record uploaded by the handheld Front Counter Picking function (see “Entering Sales Orders” on page 211 for more information).

Internal Memo IM Removal or addition of stock for an internal memo.

Internal Use IU Removal or addition of stock for internal use.

3 2 5


Non-PO Receiving

RV Addition of stock not listed on a PO. This is similar to the non-PO receiving (see “Receiving without a Purchase Order” on page 45 for more information), but can be used in warehouses that do not normally allow non-PO receiving.

Packaging PK Addition or removal of packaging materials, such as cartons or shrink-wrap.

Promotion PR Addition or removal of promotional materials, such as flyers or brochures.

Receiving Errors

RE Addition or removal of stock to fix receiving errors.

Repairs RP Removal and subsequent addition of products that are being repaired.

RMAs (Returned Materials Authorization)

RM Addition of stock received as an RMA. This is similar to the RMA receiving (see “Receiving by RMA” on page 26 for more information), but can be used in warehouses that do not normally use RMA receiving.

Samples, Other

MA Addition or removal of stock used as samples, or for reasons not covered by other adjustments.

Supplies SU Addition or removal of office supplies, such as copier paper or cleaning supplies.

Vendor Returns

VR Removal of stock to return to the vendor.

Warehouse Transfer

TR Addition or removal of stock transferred between different locations.

Work-In-Progress

WP Addition or removal of stock transferred to/from the work area of the warehouse.

Kit assembly KA Addition or removal of components to or from the kit area, such as items that were damaged during the kitting process.


3 2 6 C H A P T E R 1 1 A D J U S T I N G I N V E N T O R Y


Each miscellaneous adjustment may be configured to increase or decrease the inventory, and to upload an adjustment record to the accounting system or not.

Note: If your system supports multiple clients/companies, and you are assigned to a specific client, you will only be able to create adjustments for products assigned to that client.

ADJUSTMENTS TO LICENSE PLATES

For warehouses that use license plates, adjustments can be used for the following license plate operations:

• Creating license plates — when adjusting stock into the warehouse, putting-away the stock to a new license plate will create the license plate in Sage Accpac WMS.

• Adjust products in/out of a license plate—Adjusted products can be added to/removed from an existing license plate. The products are adjusted in/out of inventory.

• License Plate Adjust Out—Removes a whole license plate at once, and adjusts the items out of inventory. This operation is described in “Adjusting License Plates Out” on page 337.

Quality inspection

QI Removal or addition of stock that is undergoing quality inspection.


3PL

3 2 7


USING MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTMENTS

All inventory adjustments, except adjustment of an entire license plate out of inventory, involve the following steps:

1. Create the adjustment, and provide any information required, such as a reference number, product number, customer name, vendor name, and/or comment for the adjustment. Follow the procedure in “Creating an Adjustment” on page 328.

2. Move the inventory in or out of the warehouse. To move inventory into the warehouse, follow the procedure in “Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse” on page 331. To move inventory out of the warehouse, follow the procedure in “Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse” on page 334.

Each adjustment type may be configured to require that you provide information such as the vendor number, customer number, a comment, an RMA code, or other data required for your warehouse. In the procedures that follow, these prompts are not described.

To adjust an entire license plate out of inventory, follow the procedure in “Adjusting License Plates Out” on page 337.

CREATING AN ADJUSTMENT

> To create an adjustment:

1. From the main menu, press ENTER to view the second screen of functions, if necessary.

2. Press the number corresponding to Misc Adjusts.

If your system supports multiple clients/companies, a list of these is displayed. If necessary, press ENTER to display additional screens, and press the number next to the client for which you are creating the adjustment, and press ENTER.

3PL



The Adjusts menu is displayed. Your configuration will determine which adjustments are displayed.

3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of adjustments, and press the number corresponding to the type of adjustment you want to create. Depending on your configuration, you may be prompted to enter the customer number, vendor number, comment, or other information.

4. Enter any required information and press ENTER at each prompt. You are prompted to enter a reference number for this adjustment. The reference number is used to track the adjustment in Sage Accpac WMS.

5. At the Reference prompt, enter a reference number for this adjustment and press ENTER, or press [F3] if you do not need to enter a reference number. You are prompted to enter the product you are adjusting in or out.

ADJUSTS 1/2Select:1:Return / Customer2:Return / Vendor3:Misc Adjustments4:Repairs5:Transfers6:Non-PO Receipt

Return / CustomerReference:

3 2 9


If you are using multiple clients/companies, the client name/number that you selected is also displayed.



If a list of non-unique attributes is displayed, such as lot numbers, do one of the following:

• If you are adjusting a product out, or if you are adjusting a product in and the product’s attribute number matches an existing number, press the number corresponding to the attribute number you want and press ENTER.

• If you are adjusting a product in and the product has a new attribute number, press 1 and ENTER. You will be prompted to enter the lot number when you do the adjustment in.

You are prompted to select whether you want to move the product in or out of the warehouse.

Return / CustomerRef:12345PRODUCT

Return / CustomerRef:12345LF311Juicy Fruit

1-IN 2-OUT

3PL

ATT



7. Optionally, to print product labels for this product, press [F7], and at the # Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want, and press ENTER. The labels are printed and you are returned to the adjustment in/out screen.

8. To adjust the product into the warehouse, follow the procedure in “Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse” on page 331. To adjust the product out of the warehouse, follow the procedure in “Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse” on page 334.

ADJUSTING PRODUCT INTO THE WAREHOUSE

Use this function to move products into the warehouse.

Note: Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type. For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in another pick bin. For warehouses that use license plates, there are additional restrictions to consider when creating a new license plates, or adding products to existing license plates. There are license plate-specific rules that are applied to bins; for example, some bins may not be configured to keep license plate information (i.e., the bin is configured to ‘kill’ license plates). There are also rules for acceptable product mixing within a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a product cannot exist in two different packsizes in a single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and ‘free’ (non-licence plate) formats at the same time.

3 3 1


To adjust products in:

1. Create an adjustment, as described in “Creating an Adjustment” on page 328.

2. From the adjustment in/out screen, select 1 to move the selected product into the warehouse. The first sequential bin in which the product is currently stored is displayed (if applicable), and you are prompted to enter a bin into which you want to move the product.

3. At the Bin prompt, do one of the following:

If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, an error message is displayed. Press ENTER to return to the previous screen, and enter a new bin.

Return / CustomerRef:12345BIN: C1BIN:LF311Juicy Fruit

To select a bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, an error message is displayed. Press ENTER to return to the previous screen, and enter a new bin.

If you want to use license plates, you need to enter a license plate instead of a bin.

Scan or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. For an existing license plate, the screen displays the bin associated with the license plate.

If the license plate you entered does not exist, you are prompted to create the new license plate; press Y to add the license plate or N not to add the license plate. If you press Y, you are asked to assign the license plate to bin. This is the bin into which you will put the products. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin, to which you can respond with a either a bin or license plate.



4. If the bin you entered does not already contain this product, and you are prompted to select a packsize, press the number corresponding to the packsize you want and press ENTER, or press 6 to enter another packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.

If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, you are prompted for it. Scan the barcode containing the serial number, or enter the serial number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. A message appears confirming that the stock has been added, and you are returned to the product selection prompt. Repeat the procedure from step 6 in “Creating an Adjustment” for each unit of this product you want to adjust in.

Otherwise, you are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin.

5. At the Qty prompt, enter the number of packs you are adjusting into the warehouse, and press ENTER.

6. If you are prompted to enter an expiry date for the product, enter it in the required format, and press ENTER, or press [F1] to skip entering an expiry date.

If this product has a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, and you are prompted for the attribute number, scan the appropriate barcode label, or enter the attribute number and press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted to add the number, when you are prompted to add the attribute number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/enter the number again.

Return / CustomerRef:12345BIN:C1Qty:LF311Juicy FruitPACKS of 25Avail:0

ATT

ATT

3 3 3


A message is displayed, confirming that the product has been added to the inventory, and you are returned to the product selection prompt.


• To move in another product using the same adjustment, scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER, and repeat steps 2 to 6.

• To move out another product using the same adjustment, follow steps 2 to 6 in “Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse” on page 334.

8. To exit this function, press [F1] twice. You are returned to the main menu.

ADJUSTING PRODUCT OUT OF THE WAREHOUSE

> To adjust products out:


2. From the adjustment in/out screen, select 2 to move the selected product out of the warehouse.

If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, you are prompted for it. Scan the barcode containing the serial number, or enter the serial number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. A message appears confirming that the stock has been removed, and you are returned to the product selection prompt. Repeat the procedure from step 6 in “Creating an Adjustment” for each unit of this product you want to adjust out.

Return / CustomerRef:12345PRODUCT

STOCK ADDED

ATT



Otherwise, the bins, packsizes and quantities where the product is currently found are displayed. Bins marked with # indicate that their stock is reserved and cannot be selected. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed.

3. To select a bin from which you want to move the product, scan the bin’s barcode label, or press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to the bin and press ENTER. If you selected a random or overstock bin, you are prompted to select the packsize you wish to adjust.

4. Press the number corresponding to the desired packsize, or press 6 to enter a new packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.

The available product in the bin is listed, and you are prompted to enter the quantity you want to move out.

LF311 1/1Select:1:A1 2*252:B1 4*1003:BULK3 5*25004:N02 LP1234567

LF311

1 - UNIT (1) 2 - SIZ2 (25)3 - SIZ3 (100) 4 - SIZ4 (0) 5 - SIZ5 (0)6 - OTHER

Front CounterRef:12345BIN:B2Qty:LF311Juicy FruitPACKS of 100Avail: 6

3 3 5


5. At the Qty prompt, enter the number of units/packs and press ENTER.

If this product has a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, and you are prompted for the attribute number, scan the appropriate barcode label, or enter the attribute number and press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted to add the number, when you are prompted to add the attribute number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/enter the number again. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER.

A message appears confirming that the stock has been moved out, and you are returned to the product selection prompt.


• To move out another product using the same adjustment, scan the product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER, and repeat steps 2 to 5.

• To move in another product using the same adjustment, follow steps 2 to 7 in “Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse” on page 331.

7. To exit this function, press [F1] twice. You are returned to the main menu.

Front CounterRef:12345PRODUCT

STOCK REMOVED

ATT



ADJUSTING LICENSE PLATES OUT

> To adjust an entire license plate out:


2. From the adjustment in/out screen, press [F2]. You are prompted for the license plate number that you want to adjust out of inventory.

3. Scan the license plate barcode label, or enter the license plate number and press ENTER. The bin containing the license plate and the number of different items in the license plate are displayed. You are prompted to confirm the license plate adjustment out.

LICENSE PLATE OUTLICENSE PLATE #

LICENSE PLATE OUTLICENSE PLATE #LP1234567BIN: B0073 Items will be adjusted out.Yes/No

3 3 7


4. Optionally press [F2] to display the items in the license plate. The items are listed, showing the packsize and quantity of each item.

Press [F1] to return to previous screen where you are prompted to confirm the license plate adjustment out.

5. Press Y to adjust the entire license plate out of inventory; otherwise, press N and you are returned to the LICENSE PLATE # prompt where you can scan or enter a different license plate.

6. If you pressed Y, a confirmation of the license plate adjustment out is displayed. Press ENTER. You are returned to the Adjusts menu, where you continue adjusting inventory or press [F1] to return to the main menu.

B007 1/1

1: LF211 12*102: LF312 8*13: LF600 5*5



12 WAREHOUSE AND PRODUCT MAINTENANCE

The Warehouse and Product Maintenance functions allow warehouse staff with the appropriate permissions to manage various aspects of the warehouse, including:

• Adding products, if your system is configured to allow this. Described in “Adding New Products” on page 340.

• Viewing information for existing products. Described in “Displaying Product Information” on page 343.

• Setting the properties of new products, or modifying the properties of existing products. Described in “Setting or Modifying Product Properties” on page 345.

• Deleting products. Described in “Deleting Products” on page 356.

• Setting or changing the default packsizes for products. Described in “Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes” on page 358.

• Creating product cross-references. Described in “Setting, Modifying, or Deleting Product Cross-References” on page 360.

• Setting minimum/maximum replenishment levels for products (only in warehouses that use min/max advance replenishment). Described in “Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels” on page 364.

• Assigning products to bins (only in warehouses that use sticky homes). Described in “Setting or Modifying Sticky Homes” on page 372.

All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

REPLEN

3 3 9


> To access the Warehouse Maintenance menu:

From the main menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. The Warehouse Maintenance menu is displayed.

Note: The options available in the Warehouse Maintenance menu will depend on your permissions.

ADDING NEW PRODUCTS

If your system is configured to allow it, you can add new products to Sage Accpac WMS through the Product Maintenance function. Adding a product consists of two steps:

1. Add the product, as described below.

2. Set its properties, as described in “Setting or Modifying Product Properties” on page 345.


WAREHOUSE MAINT 2/21:Requuest Replen2:Product Maint

3 4 0 C H A P T E R 1 2 W A R E H O U S E A N D P R O D U C T M A I N T E N A N C E


> To add a new product:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter an identifier for the new product.

2. At the Enter Product prompt, enter a new product number and press ENTER. If more than one product matches the barcode you scanned, you are prompted to select the correct product. To select the product, follow any of the steps described in “Identifying Products” on page 10.

If your warehouse is configured to track non-unique product attributes such as lot numbers, you are prompted to provide the attribute number. Scan the attribute number on the product’s barcode label, or enter the attribute number and press ENTER.

By default, the type of product is as “stock”, with its unit of measure being “each”. (You can change these, as described in subsequent steps.) You are prompted to enter the UPC for the product.

3. At the UPC prompt, scan the UPC barcode, or enter the UPC number for the product and press ENTER; or press ENTER to skip entering a UPC.

PRODUCT MAINTEnter Product

PRODUCT MAINTLF123UPC>

Type: (Stock)Unit: (EACH)

ATT

3 4 1


4. At the Type prompt, enter the product type, according to the following valid codes, and press ENTER; or press ENTER to accept the default, stock:

5. At the Unit prompt, enter text describing the unit of measure that defines one unit of inventory (for example, each, lb, litre), and press ENTER; or press ENTER to accept the default, each. You are prompted to confirm the addition of this product to the system.

6. Press Y to add the product, or press N to cancel and return to the product entry prompt. If you pressed Y, the Product Maintenance menu is displayed.

Code Explanation

S Stock item. Use this code for regular stock items.

N Non-stock item. You can use this code for promotional items, such as flyers or brochures, or packaging items, such as shrink wrapping.

F Fabricated. You can use this code for kits or other items that must be assembled in the warehouse.

A Guaranteed available.

PRODUCT MAINTLF123UPC>1234567890123Type: (Stock)Unit: (EACH)CONFIRM (Y/N)

PROD MAINT 1/3PRODUCT> LF1231:Display Info2:Mod UPC3:Mod Attributes4:Mod Prod Class5:Mod Expiry6:Delete Product

PROD MAINT 2/3PRODUCT> LF1231:Delete Cross Ref2:Mod Size13:Mod Size24:Mod Size35:Mod Size46:Mod Size5

PROD MAINT 3/3PRODUCT> LF1231:Mod Bin Capacity



7. To set additional information for this product, follow the procedures in “Setting or Modifying Product Properties” on page 345.

8. To exit this function, press ENTER, then [F1]. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

DISPLAYING PRODUCT INFORMATION

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to view information.

2. Scan an existing product’s barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.


The Product Maintenance menu is displayed.



3 4 3


3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 1 to select Display Info. The UPC for the product is displayed, if one is defined.

4. Press ENTER to view the next screen of information. The first sequential pick bin in which the product is stored, and the product’s unit of measure, type, cube and product class are displayed.

5. To view the next screen of information, press ENTER. The expiry date for the product is displayed, if one has been defined.

6. Press ENTER to return to the Product Maintenance menu.

PROD MAINT 1/3PRODUCT> LF211Spearmint Gum

UPC:UPC02

PRODUCT MAINTPRODUCT> LF211Spearmint GumPickbin:C1Unit:1 Type:Cube:28.00000Prod Class:PCLAS1



SETTING OR MODIFYING PRODUCT PROPERTIES

You can set a new product’s properties or modify those of an existing product, including:

• UPC — see “Setting or Modifying a Product’s UPC” on page 345.

• Attributes—see “Enabling or Disabling Attribute Tracking for a Product” on page 347.

• Product class — see “Setting or Modifying a Product’s Product Class” on page 349.

• Expiry date—see “Enabling or Disabling Expiry-Date Tracking for a Product” on page 350.

• Packsizes — see “Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes” on page 358.

• Bin capacity (for dedicated bins only) — see “Setting or Modifying a Product’s Bin Capacities” on page 354.

SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCT’S UPC

> To set or modify a product’s UPC:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the UPC.



ATT

ATT

PUT


3 4 5



3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 2 to select Mod UPC. The current UPC for this product is displayed (if one is defined), and you are prompted to enter a new UPC.

4. At the To prompt, scan the UPC for the product, or enter the new UPC and press ENTER. If you leave the To prompt blank and press ENTER, you are prompted with *DELETE UPC* Confirm (Y/N)?.

5. After you complete the To prompt, you are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.


PRODUCT MAINTPRODUCT> LF211Spearmint Gum

UPC>From: UPC02To:



ENABLING OR DISABLING ATTRIBUTE TRACKING FOR A PRODUCT

If your system is configured to track product attributes, such as lot or serial numbers, you can use the Product Maintenance function to enable or disable attribute tracking for a specific product.

> To enable/disable attribute tracking for a product:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the attribute tracking setting.




ATT



3 4 7


3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 3 to select Mod Attributes. The first attribute configured for tracking is displayed, and you are prompted to enable or disable tracking of this attribute.


• If you want to enable tracking or keep tracking enabled for this attribute, press Y and ENTER.

• If you want to disable tracking or keep tracking disabled for this attribute, press N and ENTER.

If other attributes are configured to be tracked in your system, the next attribute is displayed. Repeat step 4 for all remaining attributes. When you have configured tracking for all attributes, you are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.

PRODUCT MAINT 1/3PRODUCT> LF211SERIAL #Unique - serialReceive and PickFrom: Not UsedTo: Use (Y/N)?

Attribute.

Attribute type (unique or non-unique).

Functions in which this attribute is to be tracked.

Current attribute tracking for this product (used or not used).



SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCT’S PRODUCT CLASS

If you want to assign a product to a product class through the handheld, you can use the Product Maintenance function to do so. Product classes are required for Sage Accpac WMS’s forecasting module.

> To set or modify a product’s product class:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the product class.






3 4 9


3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 4 to select Mod Prod Class. The current product class for this product is displayed (if one is defined), and you are prompted to enter a new product class.

4. At the To prompt, enter the new product class identifier and press ENTER. If you leave the To prompt blank and press ENTER, you are prompted with *DELETE CLASS* Confirm (Y/N)?.

5. After you complete the To prompt, you are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.

ENABLING OR DISABLING EXPIRY-DATE TRACKING FOR A PRODUCT

You can use the Product Maintenance function to enable or disable expiry-date tracking for a specific product. Once expiry-date tracking is enabled for a product, when a receiver receives that product, s/he will be prompted to record its expiry date.

> To enable/disable expiry tracking for a product:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the expiry-date tracking setting.

PRODUCT MAINTPRODUCT> LF311Juicy Fruit

PRODUCT CLASS>From: PCLAS1To:

ATT







3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 5 to select Mod Expiry. You are prompted to enable or disable expiry-date tracking.


• If you want to enable tracking or keep tracking enabled for expiry dates, press Y and ENTER.

• If you want to disable tracking or keep tracking disabled for expiry dates, press N and ENTER.

• If you leave the To prompt blank and press ENTER, you are prompted with *DELETE EXPIRY* Confirm (Y/N)?. N will remove the current setting for expiry tracking; Y will keep current the expiry setting.

You are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.


PRODUCT MAINT 1/3PRODUCT> LF211Doublemint Gum

EXPIRY DATE>From: NTo:

3 5 1


SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCT’S PACKSIZES

You can set or modify standard product packsizes using the Product Maintenance function, described here, or the Formal Packsizes function, which accomplishes exactly the same thing. If you do not have the appropriate permission to access the Product Maintenance function, you can use the Formal Packsizes function; see “Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes” on page 358.

The default five packsizes are Size1, Size2, Size3, Size4, and Size5, although they may be named differently in your warehouse. For an explanation of packsizes, see “Packsize” of Sage Accpac WMS.

Note: The definition of each packsize for a product is based on the definition of a unit, size for that product. The Size1 packsize is typically defined as 1 unit. If the products are never sold in units of 1, then Size1 may be the smallest size in which the product is sold; for example, packs of 10.

> To set or modify a product’s packsizes:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify packsizes.







3. Press ENTER to view the second Product Maintenance screen.

4. From the Product Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to the default packsize whose quantity you wish to set or modify, from 2 to 6. The current quantity for this packsize is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no quantity has been defined for this packsize.)

5. At the To prompt, enter a new quantity for this packsize, and press ENTER. You are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.

6. Repeat the procedure for each packsize you want to set for this product.

7. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

PROD MAINT 2/3PRODUCT>LF2111:Delete Cross Ref2:Mod size13:Mod size24:Mod size35:Mod size46:Mod size5

PROD MAINT PRODUCT>LF211Spearmint Gum

Size2>From:0To:

3 5 3


SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCT’S BIN CAPACITIES

For any product, you can define a maximum quantity of the product which may be stored in dedicated bins. You can set this capacity differently for each dedicated bin in which the product is currently stored. Once this limit is reached, warning messages will be presented to users when they are moving or putting away product to those bins with Receiving, Replenishment, Direct Move, or Miscellaneous Adjustment functions.

> To set or modify the bin capacity for a product:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set bin capacities.




3. Press ENTER twice to view the third Product Maintenance screen.

PUT


PROD MAINT 3/3PRODUCT>LF2111:Mod Bin Capacity



4. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 1 to select Mod Bin Capacity. The first dedicated bin in which the product is currently stored is displayed, as well as the current maximum capacity. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no maximum capacity has been defined for this product and bin.)

5. If you want to skip setting a maximum for this bin, press ENTER; otherwise, at the To prompt, enter the new maximum quantity for this bin, and press ENTER. The next dedicated bin in which the product is currently stored is displayed.

6. Repeat step 6 for all dedicated bins for which you want to set the capacity for this product. When no more bins are available, a message is displayed.

7. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.

PROD MAINT PRODUCT> LF311Juicy FruitA2Capacity>From:0To:

PROD MAINT 2/2PRODUCT> LF311Juicy Fruit

NO MORE DEDICATED BINS FOR THIS PROD

3 5 5


DELETING PRODUCTS

You can use the Product Maintenance function to delete a product from Sage Accpac WMS only if the product does not have any stock in the warehouse, outstanding replenishments, or outstanding receipts.

> To delete a product from WMS:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product which you want to delete.








3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 6 to select Delete Product. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

4. To delete the product, press Y; otherwise, press N to return to the Product Maintenance menu.

If the product still has stock in the warehouse, outstanding replenishments, or outstanding receipts, a message is displayed, indicating that the product cannot be deleted:

Press ENTER to return to the Product Maintenance menu.

If the product is successfully deleted, you are returned to the product selection prompt.

5. To delete additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.



*DELETE PRODUCT*CONFIRM (Y/N) ?

RFBASE INFOPRODUCT> LF123has stock in the warehouse.CANNOT DELETE!Press Enter tocontinue.

3 5 7


SETTING OR MODIFYING PRODUCT PACKSIZES

You can set or modify standard product packsizes using the Product Maintenance function (for information, see “Setting or Modifying a Product’s Packsizes” on page 352), or the Formal Packsizes function, described here, which accomplishes exactly the same thing. If you do not have the appropriate permission to access the Product Maintenance function, you can use the Formal Packsizes function.

In addition to setting packsizes, the Formal Packsizes function allows you to define a default carton size to be used in receiving functions, if your warehouse receives by case.

Note: To allow a receiving default that you create here to be used in receiving, your system must be configured to allow receiving by case. Otherwise, at receiving, a default packsize of 1 will always be assumed, regardless of the default size you set through the Formal Packsizes function.

> To set or change product packsizes:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Formal Packsizes. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set packsizes.



CARTON DEFAULTSScan ProductProduct>



3. The current quantities for each of the five default packsizes for this product are displayed. (0 indicates that no default quantity has been defined for this packsize.)

4. Press the number corresponding packsize you wish to set or change, or press 6 to create a default packsize to be used in receiving. The current quantity for the selected packsize is displayed, and you are prompted to enter a new packsize.

5. At the New prompt, enter the quantity for your selected packsize and press ENTER. If you are using inner and outer packsizes, you can use a forward slash to delimit an outer and inner packsize. For example, 1/10 would indicate an outer size of 1, with an inner size of 10. The new packsize appears in the list of packsizes.

LF409Life Savers PepOMint1 – UNIT (1)2 – SIZ2 (25)3 – SIZ3 (0)4 – SIZ4 (0)5 – SIZ5 (0)6 – Receive Dflt

CARTON DEFAULTSLF409Life Savers PepOMint

SIZ3Current: 0New:

LF409Life Savers PepOMint1 – UNIT (1)2 – SIZ2 (25)3 – SIZ3 (100)4 – SIZ4 (0)5 – SIZ5 (0)6 – Receive Dflt

3 5 9


6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each packsize you want to set, or press [F1] to exit. You are returned to the Scan Product screen.

7. To set packsizes for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 5.


SETTING, MODIFYING, OR DELETING PRODUCT CROSS-REFERENCES

A cross-reference is an alternate product number — usually a barcode — that you can use to identify a product in Sage Accpac WMS. Most commonly, this number will be the supplier’s product ID. If you create a cross-reference between the supplier’s product number and your warehouse’s product number, warehouse staff can then use either number to identify the same product in any handheld function that prompts for a product number.

You use the Product XRef function to create a new cross-reference for a product, or modify one currently being used, as described below. You use the Product Maintenance function to delete an existing cross-reference, as described in “Deleting a Product Cross-Reference” on page 362.

> To add a cross-reference number to a product:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product XRef. The Barcode Xref screen is displayed, and you are prompted to scan the alternate barcode for the product.

BARCODE XREFScan Barcode>



2. At the Scan Barcode prompt, scan the alternate identifying barcode, or enter the alternate product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter your warehouse’s product number.

3. At the Product # prompt, scan your warehouse’s product barcode, or enter your warehouse’s product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the cross-reference you have created or updated for this product.

4. Press Y to use this cross-reference for your product, or press N to cancel. A message appears confirming that the cross-reference has been updated.

5. To create cross-references for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.


BARCODE XREFScan Barcode>3756373

Product #>

BARCODE XREFBarcode>3756373LF312Doublemint Gum

CONFIRM (Yes/No)

BARCODE XREFScan Barcode>

* UPDATED *

3 6 1


DELETING A PRODUCT CROSS-REFERENCE

If you have permissions to access the Product Maintenance function, you can delete a product cross-reference.

> To delete a product’s cross-references:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to delete cross-references.




3. Press ENTER to view the second Product Maintenance screen.


PROD MAINT 2/3PRODUCT>LF3111:Delete Cross Ref2:Mod size13:Mod size24:Mod size35:Mod size46:Mod size5



4. From the Product Maintenance menu, 1 to select Delete Cross Ref. A list of existing cross-references is displayed.

5. Press ENTER to view additional screens, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to the first cross-reference you want to delete, and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

6. Press Y to confirm the deletion, or N to cancel and return to the reference selection screen, and press ENTER. You are returned to the first Product Maintenance screen.

7. To delete additional cross-references, repeat steps 2 to 6.

8. To exit the Product Maintenance function, press [F1].

LF311 1/1Ref. to delete:1:06492332:0224130


Cross Reference>0649233* DELETE REFERENCE *Confirm (Y/N) ?

3 6 3


SETTING OR MODIFYING REPLENISHMENT LEVELS

If your warehouse uses min/max advance replenishment (for information on this feature, see “Replenishment” in Sage Accpac WMS), min/max levels must be specified for each product being replenished, for each of its standard packsizes.

If you have the appropriate permissions, you use the Replenishment Levels function to set these levels. You can set min/max levels in two ways:

• At the warehouse level. If you set the min/max levels globally, you specify a total quantity for all pick bins (D-N-R bins) in the warehouse. When the Advance Replenishment function is run in Web Dispatch, if the combined total quantity of this product in all pick bins in the warehouse falls below the minimum level you specify, a replenishment request is issued. The quantity to be replenished is determined by the total maximum quantity you set for all bins in the warehouse.

• At the bin level. If you set the min/max levels at the bin level, you specify a quantity for a specific pick bin. When the Advance Replenishment function is run in Web Dispatch, if the quantity of the product in this pick bin falls below the minimum level you specify, a replenishment request is issued. The quantity to be replenished to this bin is determined by the maximum quantity you set for this bin.

Note: If your warehouse uses sticky homes, you can set minimum/maximum replenishment levels for products at the bin level with the Assign Pickbins function. For more information, see “Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels for a Specific Bin” on page 377.

REPLEN



SETTING MINIMUM REPLENISHMENT LEVELS FOR A PRODUCT

Setting the minimum replenishment level specifies the total quantity of a product in all pick bins, or the total quantity in a specific bin, below which a replenishment request should be triggered when the Advance Replenishment function is run in Web Dispatch.

For each product, you can set minimum replenishment levels globally, that is, for all pick bins in the warehouse, or for a specific bin or bins. Both options are described in the following procedure.

Note: If the warehouse does not use sticky homes, no request will be issued for bins in which the product is no longer stored.

> To set minimum replenishment levels for a product:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Replen Levels. The Replenish Levels menu is displayed.

2. From the Replenish Levels menu, press 1 to select Minimum. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set minimum replenishment levels.

REPLENISH LEVELS1-Minimum2-Maximum

REPLENISH LEVELSScan ProductProduct>

3 6 5




If default packsizes 2, 3, 4, or 5 are defined for this product, the minimum replenishment level for each packsize is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no minimum replenishment level has been set for this packsize.)

4. Press the number corresponding to the packsize for which you want to set the minimum level. The current minimum level is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no minimum replenishment level has been set for this packsize.)

LF409Life Savers PepOMint1 – UNIT (0)2 – SIZ2 (0)3 – SIZ3 (0)

REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintMinimum: 0

Minimum>




6. Scan the barcode label of the bin you want to specify, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The current minimum level for the bin is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no minimum replenishment level has been set for this bin.)

7. At the New Min prompt, enter the new minimum for this bin for this product, and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the new minimum.

REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintBin: A4Min: 0New Min: (Default:0)

REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintBin: A4Min: 600

Confirm (Y/N)

To set the total minimum replenishment level for this product for all pick bins in the warehouse, at the Minimum prompt, enter the new minimum replenishment level for this packsize and press ENTER. You are returned to the Scan Product screen. Repeat the procedure for additional products, or press [F1] to exit the function and return to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

To set the minimum replenishment level this product for a single pick bin, press [F8]. You are prompted to enter the bin for which you want to set the minimum level.

REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintMin QuantitySet For:Bin:

3 6 7


8. Press Y to confirm the new setting, or N to cancel. You are returned to the Scan Product screen.

9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 to set minimums for all other standard packsizes of this product.

10. To set minimums for additional bins for this product, or for other products, repeat steps 3 to 8.


SETTING MAXIMUM REPLENISHMENT LEVELS FOR A PRODUCT

Setting the maximum replenishment level specifies the total quantity of a product to be replenished to all pick bins, or to a specific bin or bins. When the Advance Replenishment function is run in Web Dispatch, and the replenishment request is issued, the quantity of requested stock is the remaining quantity needed to satisfy the maximum replenishment level you have defined for all bins in the warehouse, or for each specific bin.

> To set maximum replenishment levels:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Replen Levels. The Replenish Levels menu is displayed.

REPLENISH LEVELS1-Minimum2-Maximum



2. From the Replenish Levels menu, press 2 to select Maximum. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set maximum replenishment levels.



If default packsizes 2, 3, 4, or 5 are defined for this product, the maximum replenishment level for each packsize is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no maximum replenishment level has been set for this packsize.)

REPLENISH LEVELSScan ProductProduct>

LF409Life Savers PepOMint1 – UNIT (0)2 – SIZ2 (0)3 – SIZ3 (0)

3 6 9


4. Press the number corresponding to the packsize for which you want to set the maximum level. The current maximum level is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no maximum replenishment level has been set for this packsize.)


REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintMaximum: 0

Maximum>

To set the total maximum replenishment level for the product for all pick bins in the warehouse, at the Maximum prompt, enter the new maximum replenishment level for this packsize and press ENTER. You are returned to the Scan Product screen. Repeat the procedure for additional products, or press [F1] to exit the function and return to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

To set the maximum replenishment level for the product for a single pick bin, press [F8]. You are prompted to enter the bin for which you want to set the maximum level.

Continue by following step 6.

REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintMax QuantitySet For:Bin:



6. Scan the barcode label of the bin you want to specify, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The current maximum level for the bin is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no maximum replenishment level has been set for this bin.)

7. At the New Max prompt, enter the new maximum for this bin for this product, and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the new maximum.

8. Press Y to confirm the new setting, or N to cancel. You are returned to the Scan Product screen.

9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 to set maximums for all other standard packsizes of this product.

10. To set maximums for additional bins for this product, or for other products, repeat steps 3 to 8.


REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintBin: A4Max: 0New Max: (Default:0)

REPLENISH LEVELSLF409Life Savers PepOMintBin: A4Max: 2000

Confirm (Y/N)

3 7 1


SETTING OR MODIFYING STICKY HOMES

If your warehouse is configured to use sticky homes (for an explanation, see “Home” in Sage Accpac WMS), you can define which products should be associated with which bins. To do so, you use the Assign Pickbins function, which gives you the following options:

• Add a new product-bin assignment. You can associate a new product at a specific packsize with a bin, or assign an existing product to a new bin. See the procedure in “Assigning a Product to a Bin” on page 372.

• Delete a product-bin assignment from the system. If a bin is no longer used for a product that has been assigned to it, you can unassign the product from bin, and make the bin available for other products. See the procedure in “Unassigning a Product from a Bin” on page 374.

• Set or modify minimum and maximum advance replenishment levels for a product for a specific bin.See the procedure in “Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels for a Specific Bin” on page 377.

ASSIGNING A PRODUCT TO A BIN

This procedure creates an entirely new bin assignment for a product, or reassigns a product from an old bin to a new one.

> To assign or reassign a product to a bin:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Assign Pickbins. The Assign Pickbins screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the product you want to assign.

REPLEN

ASSIGN PICKBINSScan ProductProduct>





You are prompted to enter the packsize which you want to assign to the bin.

3. Enter the packsize and press ENTER. If the product already exists in another bin, its current location is displayed.

4. Scan the barcode label of the new bin to which you want to assign your product, or at the To: prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER.

If the new bin you have selected is a dedicated or random bin containing other product(s), or a non-dedicated bin containing this product in a different packsize, or if the bin is not a stick bin, an error message is displayed. Press ENTER to continue and return to the first Assign Pickbins screen, and begin the procedure again.

If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 Big RedPacksize:

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 Big RedFrom:C3 To:

3 7 3


If your product is already assigned to another bin, you are prompted to confirm that you want to re-assign your product to this new bin.

5. Press Y to assign your product to this new bin, or press N to cancel. If you press N, and the product already exists in another bin, a message is displayed; press ENTER to return to the Scan Product screen.

6. To assign additional products to sticky bins, repeat steps 2 to 5.

7. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

UNASSIGNING A PRODUCT FROM A BIN

If you want to free up a bin to make it available for other product assignments, you can delete the bin’s existing assignment.

Note: If there is any inventory of the product in the bin you want to unassign, you cannot delete the bin assignment. You must first remove all remaining quantities of the product from the bin.

ASSIGN PICKBINSThat productis already inbin: C1Re-assign stockto: A1(Y/N)?



> To unassign a product from a bin:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number that corresponds to Assign Pickbins. The Assign Pickbins screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the product you want to unassign.



You are prompted to enter the packsize you want to unassign from the bin.

3. Enter the packsize and press ENTER. The first sequential pick bin with product in this packsize is displayed.




3 7 5


4. Press [F9] to delete the bin assignment. You are prompted to confirm the bin from which you want to delete the product assignment.

5. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the bin assignment you want to delete still contains product, the message Not Empty appears. Press [F1] to return to the Scan Product screen and begin again.

You are prompted to confirm the bin assignment deletion.

6. Press Y to confirm the deletion, or N to cancel. You are returned to the Scan Product screen.

7. To exit this function, press ENTER and you are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 Packsize: 25Delete From: C1 Bin:

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 Big RedPacksize : 25From: C1

DELETE PICKBIN!! Confirm (Y/N)?!



SETTING OR MODIFYING REPLENISHMENT LEVELS FOR A SPECIFIC BIN

You can set maximum/minimum replenishment levels for a product at the bin level with the Assign Pickbins function. For more information on replenishment levels, see “Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels” on page 364.

Before you can use the Assign Pickbins function to set replenishment levels for a product for a specific bin, you must have already assigned the product to a bin. To do so, follow the procedure in “Assigning a Product to a Bin” on page 372.

> To set maximum/minimum replenishment levels for a bin assignment:

1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number that corresponds to Assign Pickbins. The Assign Pickbins screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set min/max replenishment levels for a specific bin.



REPLEN


3 7 7


You are prompted to enter the packsize for which you want to set min/max levels.

3. Enter the desired packsize and press ENTER. The first sequential pick bin with product in this packsize is displayed.

4. Press [F8] to set min/max replenishment levels for this product. You are prompted to confirm the bin for which you want to set the min/max levels.



ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 1Big RedMin/Max Quantity:Set For:C3 Bin:



5. Scan the bin’s barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The current minimum/maximum values for this product in this bin are displayed (0 indicates that this is a new replenishment level setting). You are prompted to enter a new minimum level.

6. At the New Min prompt, enter the new minimum replenishment level for this product in this bin, and press ENTER. Your new minimum value is displayed, and you are prompted to enter a new maximum level.

7. At the New Max prompt, enter the new maximum replenishment level for this product in this bin, and press ENTER. Your new maximum value is displayed, and you are prompted to confirm the new replenishment levels.

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 1Big RedBin: C1Min: 0 Max: 0New Min:(Default: 0)

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 1Big RedBin: C1Min: 200 Max: 0New Max:(Default: 0)

ASSIGN PICKBINSLF522 1Big RedBin: C1Min: 200 Max: 1000Confirm (Y/N)

3 7 9


8. Press Y to confirm the new replenishment levels, or N to cancel. You are returned to the first Scan Product screen.

9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 to set replenishment levels for additional packsizes of this product.

10. To define replenishment levels for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 8.

11. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.



13 USING LICENSE PLATES

UNDERSTANDING LICENSE PLATES

A license plate is a unique number, 9-20 characters in length, which is associated with specific products in a specific bin. License plates provide an effective way of grouping together products, and identifying and tracking those products in the warehouse.

License plates are created in Sage Accpac WMS with any process that adds stock into a bin, such as receiving, adjustments into the warehouse, and moves within the warehouse from one bin into another bin. Once the license plate is created, you can add and remove products from the license plate, move and assign the license plate to a different bin, pick the license plate to fulfill a sales order, etc. Many warehousing functions can be performed as usual by the user, while the license plate information is preserved by WMS without the need for manual intervention.

A license plate can only be associated with one single bin at a time. The items in the license plate cannot be dispersed in more than one bin. A license plate can be moved from one bin to another, essentially reassigning the license plate to the new bin.

When you create a new license plate in the warehouse, typically you will scan a carton label or track-trace number and use that as the license plate. Alternately, when creating a new license plate, you can use the License Plate Print function to print a label for the next sequential licence plate number. See “Printing License Plates” on page 287.

3 8 1


LICENSE PLATE BINS

Any bin in the warehouse that contains license plates must be configured to preserve the license plate information. By default, warehouse bins kill license plates. This means that license plated products that are moved to bins that are not configured for license plates will lose their license plate information, and the products will exist loose in the bin.

LICENSE PLATE CONSTRAINTS

The following license plate constraint must be observed at all times:

A bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and ‘free’ (non-license plate) formats at the same time.

This means that if you have a license-plated product & packsize in a bin, then all of that same product & packsize in that bin must be license plated. You cannot have product in licence plates and at the same time have that product in the same size lying around loose in the bin. This prevents warehouse staff from making mistakes when adding or removing stock from a bin, and also helps to keep your warehouse organized.

ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT MIXING

The license plate constraint does not prevent you from mixing products as follows:

• You can store license-plated products along with different non license-plated stock in the same bin. For example, bin A01 could hold product A in license plates along with product B ‘loose’. Although you are allowed to mix loose product and license plates in this way, as a best practice, you may want to avoid it.

• You can mix multiple types of license plates in the same bin. For example, pallets of product A and pallets of product B could be mixed in a bin.

Obviously, products should be clearly marked for the pickers when mixing is allowed.

3 8 2 C H A P T E R 1 3 U S I N G L I C E N S E P L A T E S


CREATING LICENSE PLATES

License plates can be created during the following warehouse operations:

• During receiving

• Receiving items into the warehouse (regular PO receiving, random receiving, regular container receiving and RMAs) —When you putaway products in temporary or permanent bins, you can create new license plates. Described in “Putting Away Products” on page 48.

• Quick Container receiving—This is an effective way of license plating all the products in a container or purchase order at one time. When you quick receive the container, you can create a new license plate to hold the entire contents of the container. Described in “Quick Container Receiving” on page 55.

• ASN receiving —You can check-in the entire carton simply by scanning the track-trace number on the cartons label. All items in the carton are added to the bin you specify and the track-trace number is captured as the license plate. Described in “Receiving By ASN Label” on page 60.

• Adjustments into the warehouse—When you putaway the products that you adjust in, you can create new license plates. Described in “Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse” on page 331.

3 8 3


ADDING PRODUCTS TO LICENSE PLATES

Once the license plate is created, you can add products to the license plate during the following warehouse operations:

• During receiving

• Receiving items into the warehouse (regular PO receiving, random receiving, regular container receiving and RMAs)—When you putaway products in temporary or permanent bins, you can add the products to existing license plates. Described in “Putting Away Products” on page 48

• Quick Container receiving—When you quick receive the container, you can add the entire contents of the container to an existing license plate. Described in “Quick Container Receiving” on page 55.

• Adjustments into the warehouse—When you putaway the products that you adjust in, you can add the products to existing license plates. Described in “Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse” on page 331

REMOVING PRODUCTS FROM LICENSE PLATES

You can move products out of a license plate using the handheld Direct Move and Adjustment functions, as follows:

• Direct Move-Out—This function can be used to remove a product (s) from a license plate and move the product(s) to a different bin location in the warehouse, for example to pick bins. When you move the last item out of the license plate, the license plate is removed from WMS altogether. Depending on your configuration, you may be required to confirm license plate removal when the last item is removed. Described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

• Adjustments-Out—This function can be used to remove products from a license plate and from inventory. For example, you may need to remove damaged goods from a license plate, but they also need to removed from the stock in the warehouse, since they are no longer saleable. Described in “Adjustments to License Plates” on page 327.



• License Plate Adjust-Out —This function removes all items in the license plate at one time and removes the license plate from WMS altogether. Described in “Adjusting License Plates Out” on page 337.

Note: When all the items are removed from a license plate, the license plate no longer exists in WMS and the license plate number can be reused.

DELETING LICENSE PLATES

Deleting a license plate lets you reuse the license plate number. License plates can be deleted as follows:

• Direct Move-Out—This function can be used to remove all product (s) one product at a time, from a license plate and to a different bin location in the warehouse. When you move the last item out of the license plate, the license plate is removed from WMS altogether. Depending on your configuration, you may required to confirm license plate removal when the last item is removed. Described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

• License Plate Adjust-Out—This function removes all items in the license plate at one time and removes the license plate from WMS altogether. Described in “Adjusting License Plates Out” on page 337.

MOVING LICENSE PLATES

Moving license plates within the warehouse is described in “Moving Inventory” on page 69.

3 8 5


PICKING AN ORDER USING LICENSE PLATES

Ensure that you understand the picking process in Sage Accpac WMS as described in Chapter 6, “Picking and Packing Orders” on page 173 before reading this section.

License plate picking is simplified and extremely effective – scan the license plate and then scan the shipping label—quantity, lots, serials, etc. are already known.

If the pick is not intended for a license plate, then regular picking is used. License plate and non-license plate picking can be freely mixed in an order.

Sage Accpac WMS supports two kinds of license plate picking:

The host system wants a specific license plate to be picked—The desired license plate number is downloaded from the host with the order, and restricts WMS to only select that license plate during allocation and picking. For successful allocation, the order has to match the contents of the license plate exactly. WMS will hold the order in HELD FORMAT if there is any mismatch between the requirements and the contents of the license plate.

When the picker is prompted for the first product, they go to the bin and scan or enter the license plate. If the picker selects a different license plate than that requested, even if the contents of both license plates are the same, the picker will receive a message that it is the wrong license plate.

Sage Accpac WMS allocates orders using license-plated stock—The picker is instructed to find the first product, and may scan any license plate that contains one of these products. WMS processes the details as a single pick. The bin must be configured for uniform license plates, which means that all license plates in a bin containing a product have the same mix of quantities-product-packsizes. This ensures that the picker can select any license plate (since all the license plates are the same).

For each pick, WMS validates that the license plate contains what is expected and if the pick is for a specific license plate, that the license plate is the one indicated in the order. Using license plate picking there is no query for quantity, or for serial/ lot numbers or other attributes, since this is all known.



INDEX

Aadding

barcodes 360bin assignments 372cross-references 360new license plates 48, 50, 58, 60, 327, 332,

383product 339, 340products to an existing license plate 48, 50,

58, 66, 327, 332, 383, 384purchase orders to wave 19sales orders to wave 183

adding bins 50, 58, 61adjusting

license plates out 337products in 331products out 334

adjustmentcreating 328types of 325

advance replenishmentmin/max 364setting min/max levels for 364, 377

ASN receiving 60ASN SSCC-18 label, reprinting 288attribute

handling product 12identifying products with 10setting tracking for a product 347

Bbarcode 360

deleting 362scanning 6scanning additional 259

batch picking 177, 196BATCHPCK location 196, 221, 222bin

assigning products to 372finding empty 110looking up contents 65printing overstock labels for products 284querying 110removing product assignments 374searching 110setting or modifying capacity 354

bin capacity, setting or modifying 354bin label, printing 272Bin Lookup 65, 117box size, changing 222

Ccancelling an action 14capacity, setting for bins 354CART location 107carton

adding to pallets 261changing box size 222combining 232processing shipping 239recording details 252

3 8 7


recording shipment information 250relabelling 233, 234repacking 226re-rating shipping 248restarting repacking 228scanning shipping 239stopping repacking 228weighing shipping 239

carton contents label, printing 293carton picking 180Carton Shipping 239carton summary label, printing 295case picking 180changing

barcodes 360box size 222cross-references 360min/max levels 364packsizes 358replenishment levels 364

closing purchase orders 54codes

miscellaneous adjustment 325receiving 41

combining cartons 232completing

cycle count 320kits 160packaging 160purchase orders 54

consolidation, stock 53, 80, 95, 144, 331container

quick receiving 55receiving 16restarting receipt 31stopping receipt 31wave 23

contents label, printing 293counting

by bin 301, 302by date 302by product 302cycle 299entire inventory 299

creatingcross-references 360kit 167license plates 48, 50, 58, 60, 327, 332, 383miscellaneous adjustments 328product 340products 339replenishment requests 119sales orders 211transfer purchase orders 62wave of sales orders 185

cross-referencedeleting 362setting 360

Crystal Reports packslip, reprinting 241, 291cycle counting 299

by bin 301, 302by date 302, 304by each 313, 317by product 302, 306by quantity 313, 314completing 320restarting 323stopping 322

Ddefault values, accepting 9deleting

bin assignments 374product 356product cross-reference 362

detailsrecording carton 252

3 8 8


recording shipment 251Direct Move 69

for replenishment 118two-step 70

Direct Move In 80license plate 88multiple products 85single product 81

Direct Move Out 71license plate 78multiple products 76single product 72, 78

Direct Move, one-step 91directed putaway 110disassembling kits 169displaying product info 343

Eediting packsizes 358empty bin, finding 110, 113entering sales orders 211entering work orders 167errors, shipping 245exiting 14expiry date, setting tracking for a product 350external process, marking complete 264

FF1 key 14Fill Bins 141finding

empty bins 113homes for products 110

Finish Kits 160finishing

kit 160

packaging 160Formal Packsizes function 358full count 299full-case picking 180function keys 8

Ggroup, letting down stock for 124

Hhomes

finding for products 110single 53, 80, 95, 144, 331sticky 53, 80, 95, 144, 331

Iidentifying products 10info, getting product 343interrupting

cycle count 322picking wave 189PO receipt 29purchase order receipt 27wave of purchase orders 27

inventoryadjusting in 331adjusting out 334completing count of 320counting all 299counting by bin 301, 302counting by date 302, 304counting by each 313, 317counting by product 302, 306counting by quantity 313, 314cycle counting 299

3 8 9


letting down 123letting down by group 124letting down by kit 139letting down by pick zone 135letting down by product 132letting down by quantity 128moving 69moving in license plate 88moving in multiple products 85moving in single product 81moving out 71moving out license plates 78moving out multiple products 76, 78moving out single product 72recounting all 308, 311restarting cycle count 323stopping cycle count 322unreserving 105

Kkeys, function 8kit

building 153completing 160creating 167disassembling 169entering 167finishing 160letting down stock 139pulling 153reversing 169

Llabel

ASN SSCC-18 288bin 272

carton contents 293carton summary 295contents 293license plates

license platesprinting 287

overstock 280picking/shipping 289product/UPC 276relabelling a carton 233, 234SCC-14 285SSCC-18 289

Letdown Stock 123by group 124by kit 139by pick zone 135by product 132by quantity 128

letdown ticket 117letting down stock 123

by group 124by kit 139by pick zone 135by product 132by quantity 128

license platesadding new license plates 48, 50, 58, 60,

327, 332, 383, 384adding products to an existing license plate 48,

50, 58, 66, 327, 332, 383, 384adjusting out 337creating 48, 50, 58, 60, 327, 332, 383moving 78, 88, 99moving in 88moving out 78removing products 66, 384

logging on 1logical printer 268

3 9 0


logon 1looking up bins 65

MMark as Repacked 223Mark External 264marking an external process complete 264maximum product levels, setting 368menu

Overstock 119Print Labels 270Repack 223Shipping 240Warehouse Maintenance 340Work Orders 153

messages, shipping 242min/max advance replenishment 364min/max levels

setting 364setting for sticky homes 377

minimum product levels, setting 365miscellaneous adjustment

creating 328products in 331products out 334receiving 17types of 325

modifyingbarcodes 360cross-references 360min/max levels 364packsizes 358product cross-reference 360replenishment levels 364

movinginventory 69license plate in 88license plates 78, 88, 99

multiple products in 85multiple products in one step 96multiple products out 76, 78products 69products in 80products out 71serialized products 115single product in 81single product in one step 91single product out 72, 78

NN/M label, printing 294new carton label 233, 234non-PO receiving 17numbered carton contents label, printing 294

Oone-scan picking 180, 205one-step

Direct Move 91Pallet Move 96

opening miscellaneous adjustments 328order

creating 211creating wave 185picking wave 193printing overstock labels for 282printing product labels 279repacking 223starting wave 183

order picking 179overstock label

printing 280printing by bin 284printing by product 281

3 9 1


printing for entire sales order 282Overstock menu 119

Ppackaging 153

completing 160packsize, setting or modifying 358packslip

reprinting 241, 291packslip, reprinting Crystal 291pallet label, printing 261Pallet Move In 85Pallet Move Out 76, 78Pallet Move, one-step 96pallet, adding cartons to 261paper packslip, reprinting 241, 291physical printers 268pick

shorting 206, 207shorting entire line 209shorting partial quantity 208skipping 206, 207

pick-and-pass picking 178picking

by batch 177, 196by case 180by order 179by product 177, 199by scanning each unit 178by wave 193by zone 179in reverse 179interrupting 189one-scan 180, 205pick-and-pass 178regular 193restarting 188scanner 178

sequential zone 179shortcut 180simultaneous zone 179stopping 188unpick 209

picking modes 175, 192picking styles 174picking/shipping label

reprinting 289PO receiving 16Print Labels menu 270Print Redirect 268, 270printers

assignments 268logical 268physical 268redirecting 268

printingbin labels 272carton contents labels 293carton summary labels 295contents label 293license plates 287N/M labels 294numbered carton contents labels 294overstock labels 280overstock labels by bin 284overstock labels by product 281overstock labels for entire sales order 282pallet labels 261product labels by product 277product/UPC labels 276product/UPC labels for entire sales order 279reprinting packslip 241SCC-14 285summary labels 295

processing shipments 239product

adding 339, 340

3 9 2


adjusting in 331adjusting out 334assigning to bins 372attributes 10completing count of 320counting all 299counting by bin 301, 302counting by date 302, 304counting by each 313, 317counting by product 302, 306counting by quantity 313, 314cross-references 360cycle counting 299deleting 356deleting cross-reference 362finding homes for 110getting info 343handling attributes 12identifying 10letting down 123letting down by group 124letting down by kit 139letting down by pick zone 135letting down by product 132letting down by quantity 128modifying UPC 345moving 69moving in, multiple 85moving in, single 81moving multiple in one step 96moving out 71moving single in one step 91putting away 33, 48recounting all 308, 311repacking 230restarting cycle count 323restocking 107setting attribute tracking 347setting expiry-date tracking 350

setting or modifying packsizes 358setting or modifying properties 345setting product class 349stopping cycle count 322unreserving 105

product class, setting for a product 349Product Maintenance

adding new product 340adding products 339deleting product 356deleting product cross-reference 362deleting products 356displaying product info 343modifying packsizes 358modifying product properties 345setting attribute tracking 347setting bin capacity 354setting expiry-date tracking 350setting product class 349setting UPC 345

product picking 177, 199product returns, putaway 107Product XRef 360product/UPC label

printing 276, 277printing for entire sales order 279

Pull Kitting 153pulling kits 153purchase order

closing 54completing 54receiving 16restarting receipt of 29stopping receipt of 29

putaway 33, 48directed 110returned products 107

putting awayproducts 33, 48

3 9 3


returned products 107

Qquerying bins 110quick container receiving 55quitting 14

Rrandom receiving 36reassigning printers 268receiving

additional prompts 17by ASN label 60by miscellaneous adjustment 17by product 36by purchase order 16by RMA 16, 24codes 41container 16non-PO 17purchase order 16quick container 55random 36restarting wave 29starting purchase order wave 19stopping wave 29wave 18without purchase order 17

Record Shipment 250Recount 308, 311recounting entire inventory 308, 311redirecting printers 268relabelling a carton 233, 234removing products from a license plate 66, 384Repack menu 223Repack station 2

repackaging 153repacking

combining cartons 232entire order 223restarting 228single carton 226single item 230stopping 228

REPLENIS location 141Replenish Levels 364

setting maximum 368setting minimum 365

replenishmentby bulk location 124by Direct Move 118by kit 139by product 132by zone 135filling bins 141groups 124one-step 118two-step 118

replenishment group, letting down stock 124replenishment levels

setting 364setting for sticky homes 377setting maximum 368setting minimum 365

Replenishment Report 117replenishment request, creating 119reprinting

ASN SSCC-18 labels 288Crystal packslip 291packslip 241picking/shipping labels 289SSCC-18 label 289

restartingcontainer receiving 31cycle count 323

3 9 4


picking 188PO receipt 29repacking 228wave of purchase orders 27wave of sales orders 188

Restock 107restocking inventory 107returns 107reverse kitting 169reverse picking 179RMA receiving 16, 24

Ssales order

creating 211creating wave 185picking wave 193printing overstock labels for 282printing product labels for 279repacking 223restarting wave 188starting wave 183stopping wave 188, 189

sales order by walking 211scanner picking 178scanning

barcodes 6shipments 239shipping cartons 239

SCC-14 label, printing 285searching

bins 110empty bins 113

sequential zone picking 179setting

maximum product levels 368min/max levels 364min/max product levels for sticky homes 377

minimum product levels 365packsizes 358product cross-reference 360replenishment levels 364

shipmentadding to pallets 261marking external process complete 264processing 239recording information 250re-rating 248scanning barcodes 259weighing 239

shipment details, recording 251shipping

errors 245marking external process complete 264messages 242scanning barcodes 259staged order 239

shipping cartonadding to pallets 261recording details 252recording information 250re-rating 248scanning 239weighing 239

shipping labelreprinting 289

Shipping menu 240short products, handling 206shortcut picking 180shorting

entire line 209partial quantity 208picks 206, 207

simultaneous zone picking 179single homes 53, 80, 95, 144, 331skipping picks 206, 207SOBWA 211

3 9 5


SSCC-18 label, reprinting 289staged order 239starting

container wave 23wave of purchase orders 19wave of sales orders 180

sticky homes 53, 80, 95, 144, 331adding 372deleting 374setting min/max levels 377

stockadjusting in 331adjusting out 334completing count of 320counting all 299counting by bin 301, 302counting by date 302, 304counting by each 313, 317counting by product 302, 306counting by quantity 313, 314cycle counting 299letting down 123letting down by group 124letting down by kit 139letting down by pick zone 135letting down by product 132letting down by quantity 128moving 69moving in license plate 88moving in multiple products 85moving in single product 81moving out 71recounting all 308, 311restarting cycle count 323stopping cycle count 322unreserving 105

Stock Count 299first count 308, 309

recount 308, 311stopping

any function 14container receiving 31cycle count 322picking 188, 189PO receipt 29repacking 228wave of purchase orders 27wave of sales orders 188, 189

summary label, printing 295system locations

BATCHPCK 196, 221, 222REPLENIS 141TRANSIT 70

Ttransfer purchase orders 62TRANSIT location 70two-step Direct Move 70

Uunpicking 209unreserving inventory 105UPC, setting for a product 345updating

barcodes 360cross-references 360packsizes 358replenishment levels 364

Vviewing product info 343

3 9 6


WWarehouse Maintenance menu 340wave

adding sales orders 183container 23creating 185picking 193purchase orders 19receiving 18receiving, starting 19restarting receiving 29restarting sales order 188starting container 23starting purchase order 19starting sales orders 180stopping receiving 29

stopping sales order 188, 189waving sales orders 185Web Workstation 2weighing shipping cartons 239work orders

See kitWork Orders menu 153

Zzone picking 179

defined 179sequential, defined 179simultaneous, defined 179

zone, selecting for picking 181

3 9 7

warehouse management system - sage partner portal · pdf filepicking orders by wave (regular...

Documents